Worth Every Penny Joycast: Recent Episodes
Sarah Petty
How do I build my dream portrait photography business without sacrificing my family and freedom? How do I find photography clients who want more than digital files? What should I charge for my photos? What’s the best way to market for photography clients? Am I ready for a studio?
Welcome to the Worth Every Penny Joycast where photographer and New York Times Best-Selling author, Sarah Petty, will answer these questions and more.
With 3 kids under 3, Sarah decided she wanted to make money with photography. But it wasn’t as easy as it looked. After a few years and lots of tears, she built her little portrait photography business into one of America’s most profitable and this joycast will show you how. It’s designed for photographers who want more from their portrait hotography business, more profits, more clients and more free time…and don’t want to sacrifice their family along the way.
Each week you’ll learn pricing tips, marketing ideas, selling tips and get insights into what’s working now. Along with a huge helping of motivation to build your own photography business where your clients say you’re worth every penny.
You can find Sarah Petty at: www.joyofmarketing.com www.instagram.com/sarah.petty www.facebook.com/thejoyofmarketing
Do you ever catch yourself thinking, "If I just had better gear, then I could finally charge what I'm worth?" It's one of the biggest lies photographers believe, and it's keeping too many talented artists stuck. The truth is, your camera isn't what's holding your business back.
In this week's Worth Every Penny Joycast, Sarah Petty shares what she discovered after surveying six figure photographers in her community. The results might surprise you. Many built thriving, profitable businesses with older cameras, used lenses, and simple lighting. What set them apart wasn't expensive equipment, it was a business model built around serving clients and selling finished artwork, not digital files.
Here's what you'll learn:
• Why photographers are hitting six figures with surprisingly affordable gear • How a boutique business model helps you stop competing on price and start selling an unforgettable experience • Where your money should actually go if you want to build a more profitable photography business
If you've been waiting to feel "ready" before raising your prices or growing your business, this episode is the mindset shift you've been needing. Press play and discover why your next breakthrough has far less to do with what's in your camera bag than you think.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if getting laid off wasn't the end of your story, but the beginning of building a business no one could take away? If you've ever wondered whether you're truly "good enough" to charge premium prices, Nicole McMann's journey will remind you that confidence isn't something you're born with, it's something you build.
This week on the Joycast, Baltimore photographer Nicole McMann shares how losing her nonprofit job pushed her to finally pursue the photography business she'd been putting off for years. Starting without paying clients or a portfolio, she trusted the process, landed her first family session, and walked away from her ordering appointment with a $9,568 sale and a whole new belief in herself.
● How trusting a proven process helped her overcome fear and charge premium prices with confidence ● The mindset shift that turned self-doubt into a $9,500 family portrait sale ● Why building skills no one can take away creates freedom far beyond photography
If you've been waiting until you feel "ready," this conversation is the reminder you need. Your next chapter doesn't start when everything is perfect. It starts the moment you decide to believe that your work, and your future, are worth investing in.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if AI isn't the biggest threat to your photography business? What if the real risk is building a business around something clients can replace? As AI reshapes the industry, this episode will challenge what you think people are actually paying for and reveal why some photographers will struggle while others become more valuable than ever.
In this episode, Sarah breaks down the two photography business models that are heading in very different directions. She shares why selling an experience, guiding clients, and creating heirloom artwork isn't just a premium service, it's the one thing AI can't replicate. If you've been wondering how to future-proof your business, this conversation couldn't come at a better time.
• Why photographers who sell transactions are most vulnerable to AI, and what clients truly value instead
• The mindset shift from selling digital files to creating meaningful experiences and lasting heirlooms
• A simple five-step client process that builds trust, increases sales, and makes your business irreplaceable
If you've been feeling uncertain about where photography is headed, this episode will give you clarity and confidence. The future doesn't belong to the photographers with the best gear. It belongs to the ones who create moments, memories, and relationships that technology can never replace. Press play and discover how to become one of them.RESOURCES:
Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You don't need more gear, more followers, or another random marketing hack. What you need is a business built on the right foundation. If you're just getting started, or wondering why photography still feels harder than it should, this episode could save you years of frustration.
This week, Sarah shares the five biggest mistakes she'd avoid if she were starting her photography business from scratch in 2026. After building a multi million dollar portrait business over nearly three decades, she's revealing the lessons she wishes she'd known from day one, and the simple shifts that lead to more profit, more confidence, and more time for the life you actually want.
• Why choosing the right business model from the beginning changes everything, including how much time you spend working
• The pricing mindset that helps you build a profitable business from day one, instead of trying to "earn the right" to charge more later
• Why real relationships, printed artwork, and clear communication will always outperform chasing followers and selling digital files
If you've been second guessing your path or feeling overwhelmed by all the conflicting advice online, this episode will bring clarity. Press play and start building a photography business that supports your life, instead of taking it over.RESOURCES:
Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You know you're talented. But if you've spent years undercharging, second guessing yourself, or letting life convince you your dreams have to wait, you're not alone. Sometimes the hardest part isn't learning new skills. It's believing your work is finally worth it.
This week, Sarah sits down with Clarksville, Tennessee photographer Faith Doggett, whose thriving documentary photography business disappeared almost overnight in 2020. After years away from photography, Faith shares how she rebuilt her confidence, embraced a proven system, and landed a $3,487 portrait sale that changed how she sees herself and her business forever.
• How to stop letting fear dictate your pricing and finally charge with confidence • Why having a simple, repeatable system creates freedom instead of overwhelm • The mindset shift that helped Faith rebuild her business, one confident step at a time
If you've been waiting for permission to believe bigger things are possible for your photography business, this conversation might be exactly what you need to hear. Press play, your next chapter could start today.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever feel like you're working harder than ever, yet still being mistaken for "just another photographer"? The difference between an amateur and a boutique photographer isn't talent, gear, or experience. It's the way they think, serve, and run their business.
In this week's Joycast, Sarah Petty breaks down the 8 habits that separate thriving boutique photographers from everyone else. These simple shifts can completely change how clients see you, what they're willing to invest, and how much joy you find in your business.
• Why saying "no" to the wrong inquiries creates space for your best clients • The overlooked conversations that turn price shoppers into lifelong fans • How small details, from consultations to packaging, dramatically increase perceived value
If you've been wondering what professional photographers do differently, this episode gives you a clear roadmap. Pick one idea, implement it this week, and start building the business you've been working toward.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever feel like you're working harder than ever in your photography business, yet still wondering why the numbers don't add up? If business planning feels overwhelming, this episode might completely change the way you think about growth, profit, and freedom.
In this solo episode, Sarah Petty breaks down the simple one-page business plan she's used for decades. Instead of complicated spreadsheets and endless projections, she shares the three numbers that can help you build a profitable photography business around the life you actually want to live.
• The one metric that impacts your income, workload, and long-term freedom more than anything else • How to reverse-engineer your income goals into a realistic number of ideal clients • Why clarity around your numbers makes every marketing and pricing decision easier
If you've been craving a simpler path forward, this conversation is a reminder that success doesn't have to be complicated. Press play and discover how a single page can bring more focus, confidence, and profit to your photography business. ✨
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever feel like you've worked hard for years, yet still can't figure out why some clients say yes and others disappear? That tension between knowing your craft and building a profitable business can be exhausting. This conversation will feel deeply familiar.
This week, Sarah sits down with Ginger, a photographer with 20+ years behind the camera, who was on the verge of walking away from the business she loved. After years of guessing, second-guessing, and feeling alone, she discovered what changed everything: a clear system, confidence in her pricing, and a better way to serve clients.
• Why more experience doesn't always equal more profit, and what finally unlocked consistent sales • The mindset shift that helped Ginger confidently present premium artwork without fear • How serving clients more deeply led to bigger orders, stronger relationships, and renewed joy
If you've ever wondered whether it's too late to make a change, or felt stuck despite your talent, Ginger's story is the reminder you need. Press play and discover what's possible when you stop guessing and start trusting a proven path.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you've been treating photography like a side hustle because you're not sure you're "good enough" yet, this episode is for you. The biggest thing standing between you and real income might not be your talent. It might be the stories you keep telling yourself.
In this solo episode, Sarah shares the five mindset shifts that completely changed her photography business. From letting go of comparison to trusting yourself before you feel ready, this conversation is a reminder that growth starts long before perfect confidence arrives.
• Why your clients care more about the experience you create than technical perfection • How comparison keeps photographers stuck in someone else's version of success • The powerful difference between making hobby decisions and business decisions
If you've been waiting for permission, more experience, or the "right time" to take your business seriously, consider this your sign. Press play and dis
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever feel like your calendar is packed in the fall, then painfully quiet by January? That feast-or-famine cycle can leave even talented photographers questioning what comes next.
In this episode, Sarah Petty unpacks why discounts, mini sessions, and desperate "now booking" posts often make slow seasons worse. Instead, she shares how profitable photographers create demand year-round by building strategic partnerships and meaningful campaigns that clients actually want to be part of.
You'll hear:
• Why discounting trains clients to wait and quietly devalues your work • How partnerships with local businesses and charities can create consistent bookings • The secret to building urgency without relying on sales or mini sessions
If you're tired of wondering where your next client is coming from, this conversation offers a smarter, more sustainable path forward. Press play and start building a business that feels steady in every season.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you're posting every day, announcing availability, and still hearing crickets, this episode might explain why. The truth is, most photographers treat social media like a billboard when what their clients really want is a relationship. If you're tired of chasing likes that never turn into bookings, this conversation will change how you show up online.
In this episode, Sarah Petty breaks down why "now booking" posts often push premium clients away and shares the mindset shift that helps photographers attract the right people without feeling salesy. You'll learn how to use social media as a connection tool, stay top of mind during life's milestone moments, and create content that builds trust instead of desperation.
• Why premium buyers respond to relationships, not repeated sales posts • Sarah's simple HYPE framework for creating content that connects and converts • How listening to your audience can lead to bookings faster than chasing engagement metrics
If social media feels exhausting, confusing, or like a never-ending hamster wheel, you're not alone. This episode offers a refreshing reminder that the goal isn't to go viral. It's to build genuine relationships that lead to meaningful, profitable work. Press play and discover a smarter way to show up online.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Most photographers think talent is the thing that builds a profitable business. But what if the photographers winning awards are also the ones quietly burning out, overworking, and barely making money? This episode is the wake-up call so many portrait photographers need.
Sarah Petty breaks down the six business skills photographers often avoid, even though they're the exact skills that create freedom, profit, and a family-first life. From cash flow and outsourcing to planning, branding, and building genuine client relationships, this conversation pulls back the curtain on what actually moves a business forward.
• Why "busy" doesn't always mean profitable, and the numbers every photographer needs to understand • The mindset shift that helps photographers stop drowning in busywork and start buying back their time • How genuine human connection leads to better clients, stronger referrals, and more meaningful work
If you've been feeling stretched thin, reacting instead of leading, or wondering why your business still feels harder than it should, this episode will feel like a deep exhale. Press play, you might realize the missing piece isn't your photography at all.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if the thing you've been overlooking is actually the thing that could change everything? In a world obsessed with fast bookings and digital files, it's easy to believe you need more clients, more hustle, and more content to succeed. But the photographers building sustainable, profitable businesses are often doing something much quieter, and far more meaningful.
In this week's Joycast, Sarah Petty breaks down the "boring" business model that helped her go from overwhelmed mom of three to one of America's most profitable photographers. This episode is a powerful reminder that success doesn't come from chasing trends. It comes from serving people deeply and creating artwork that actually matters in their lives.
Here's a peek at what you'll walk away with:
• Why selling wall portraits creates more freedom, profit, and connection than chasing high-volume sessions • The mindset shift that helps beginner photographers confidently charge more, even without a perfect portfolio • How simple systems, not talent alone, are what truly create thrilled clients and repeat referrals
If you've been feeling exhausted trying to "keep up" with the photography industry, this episode might feel like permission to build your business differently. Slower. Simpler. More intentionally. Press play and rediscover what people are really investing in when they hire you.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Most photographers aren't struggling because they lack talent. They're struggling because they built a business that demands everything from them and gives very little back. If you've ever felt exhausted chasing sessions, undercharging to stay booked, or wondering if this industry can actually support your life, this episode will hit home.
In this week's Joycast, Sarah Petty breaks down the real difference between a $400 portrait photographer and a $4,000 portrait photographer. Spoiler alert, it has nothing to do with your camera or your market. It's about the client experience, the relationships you build, and the business model you choose. Sarah shares the mindset shifts and practical changes that help photographers stop competing on price and start creating profitable, sustainable businesses.
Here's a sneak peek:
● Why sales actually begin in the very first client conversation
● The surprising reason clients invest more when they're more involved
● How intentional planning creates bigger orders with less overwhelm
If you're tired of hustling for small orders and craving a business that gives you more freedom, more confidence, and deeper client connections, this episode will show you what's possible.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're working nonstop, booking sessions, delivering galleries… and still feeling stuck. Like no matter how hard you push, the income just won't follow. What if the problem isn't you, but the model you've been taught to follow?
In this episode, Sarah Petty pulls back the curtain on the exact 4-step process she used to build a six-figure portrait business, without burning out or missing life at home. It's a shift in thinking, pricing, and how you serve.
• Why low-priced digital sessions quietly cap your growth • The mindset shift from selling photos to creating experiences • How fewer clients can actually mean more income and freedom
If you've been hustling harder with little return, this might be the reframe you've been needing. Press play, your next level could be simpler than you think.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're working nonstop, tweaking, learning, upgrading… and still not seeing the money reflect the effort. It's frustrating, confusing, and honestly a little defeating. What if the real problem isn't your talent, but the beliefs quietly running your business?
In this episode, Sarah Petty pulls back the curtain on seven industry "truths" that are actually keeping photographers stuck. From her own journey out of overwhelm to building a wildly profitable business, she shares what actually creates momentum, and why this matters more than ever right now.
• The hidden "busy work" that feels productive but keeps you broke • Why selling from your own wallet is silently capping your income • The mindset shift that turns doubt into forward motion
If something feels off in your business but you can't name it, this is the clarity you've been craving. Press play, you might finally see what's been holding you back.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You know that quiet frustration, when your talent is real but your income doesn't reflect it. When you're working hard, giving everything away, and still wondering why it's not clicking. This episode speaks right to that moment.
Audrey shares what it looked like to start over in a brand new city, no clients, no safety net, and stuck in a cycle that wasn't working. Her turning point wasn't more hustle, it was a shift in how she saw her value and her business.
• The mindset shift that turned $350 clients into $1,000+ orders • Why "doing what everyone else does" keeps you stuck and underpaid • What finally made her feel confident charging what she's worth
If you've been grinding and hoping something will change, this might be the moment it finally does. Press play and listen for the shift you've been avoiding.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You can feel it in the room. The hesitation. The silence. And somehow, you make it mean something about you. But what if it's not your pricing, or your talent at all?
In this episode, Sarah Petty breaks down the four client personalities that shape how people buy, and how learning to meet them where they are can completely change your sales experience
• Why "one-size-fits-all" communication quietly costs you thousands • How to spot decision styles before the ordering appointment • What to say to make saying yes feel easy, natural, and right
If selling has ever felt heavy or confusing, this will shift everything. Press play, and start serving your clients in a way that finally works for both of you.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're working nonstop, booking sessions, delivering galleries… and still wondering why it feels so hard to make real money. If pricing has ever left you second-guessing everything, this episode will hit close to home.
Sarah Petty pulls back the curtain on the 8 pricing mistakes that quietly drain photographers' income and confidence. From guessing your prices to overgiving and undercharging, she shares the hard-earned lessons that changed everything. • The hidden ways "being affordable" keeps you stuck and exhausted • Why more options and digital files are costing you more than you think • How to finally price with clarity, confidence, and a real system
If you've been blaming yourself or your talent, this will shift everything. You're not broken, your pricing is. Press play and start rebuilding a business that actually supports your life.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You don't need more hustle. You need habits that actually hold your life together. If you've ever felt like success means choosing between your family and your business, this will hit deep.
In this episode, Sarah pulls back the curtain on the daily habits she's seen in women quietly building six and seven figure photography businesses, without losing themselves in the process.
• The simple planning shift that turns chaos into clarity • Why your energy, not your time, is your real currency • How letting go of "doing it all" unlocks real growth
If you're tired of spinning your wheels and ready for steady, grounded progress, press play. This might be the reset you've been needing.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if the very things you worry might hold you back as a mom are actually your biggest business superpowers? After 27 years in the photography industry, Sarah shares the hard-earned wisdom that proves women, especially mothers, are uniquely positioned to build thriving portrait businesses.
From opening her studio just weeks before 9/11 to becoming one of the most profitable photographers in the U.S., Sarah reflects on the lessons that shaped her journey. In this episode, she distills nearly three decades of experience into practical advice for women photographers who want both a profitable business and a family-first life.
• Why the multitasking and systems you use at home can become your greatest business advantage • How resilience, connection, and calm energy create unforgettable client experiences • The mindset shift that helps women stop "figuring it out alone" and start building real momentum
If you've ever wondered whether you can build a photography business without sacrificing your family life, this episode is for you. Press play and hear the advice Sarah wishes every woman photographer knew from the beginning.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're busy. Weekends booked, nights spent editing, yet the numbers still don't add up. If you've ever wondered, "Why am I working so hard and still not making real money?" this episode might hit close to home.
In this solo episode, Sarah Petty shares what she's learned from working with more than 33,000 photographers. The truth? Most aren't failing because of talent. They're focused on the wrong things. Sarah walks through the hidden bottlenecks that quietly keep photographers stuck and how to finally break through them.
• The 5 diagnostic questions that instantly reveal what's holding your business back • How to identify and fix the single bottleneck slowing your growth • Why more clients won't solve your problem if your business model is broken
If you've been feeling busy but stuck, this conversation may give you the clarity you've been missing. Press play and start focusing on what actually moves your business forward.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever wonder what actually pushes photographers past the $200K mark? At Go Boutique Live this year, more photographers crossed that milestone than ever before. And the truth might surprise you. It wasn't hustle. It was clarity.
In this episode, Sarah sits down with several brand new $200K Yay Award winners who share the shifts that finally unlocked their growth. From mindset to systems, their stories reveal what really changes when your business levels up.
• Turning numbers into a motivating game that drives consistent growth • Letting go of scarcity and finally charging what your work is worth • Why systems, support, and clear offers create freedom, not more work
If you've been circling your next income milestone and wondering what's missing, this episode will open your eyes. Press play and hear what changed for photographers who finally broke through.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If your heart races before every session. If you replay pricing conversations in your head at 2 a.m. If you've ever thought, "I'm just too shy for this."
This episode is your permission slip to stop trying to be louder and start being smarter.
Sarah shares why being introverted isn't the thing holding you back, it might be your biggest advantage. Through Audrey Terris' story, from hiding behind $400 sales to confidently crossing $1,000 again and again, you'll see what changes when personality stops being the excuse and systems take the lead.
You'll walk away with:
• A powerful reframe that turns "I'm awkward" into "I'm deeply attuned" • Why scripts and systems calm anxiety and make selling feel natural • The three conversations that actually grow your business, and how introverts win at all of them
If you're tired of thinking you have to be bubbly, pushy, or someone you're not to succeed, this is the truth your nervous system has been waiting to hear. You don't need a new personality. You need a plan. Press play and let's build it together.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're working nonstop, filling your calendar with mini sessions—and still barely scraping by. It feels like you're making progress, but what if these quick wins are actually keeping you stuck? In this episode, Sarah Petty unpacks the hidden costs of mini sessions and shows you a better way to build profit and joy.
● Why mini sessions attract the wrong clients—and burn you out ● The emotional cost you're quietly paying every busy season ● A simple framework to start attracting high-value clients today
If you've been wondering why it still feels so hard, even when you're "booked," this episode will help you shift course. Hit play and take the first step out of the mini session trap.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You know that quiet voice that says, "I'm meant for more than this." And then life hits. Grief. A cross-country move. A husband losing his job. Most people would shrink back. Jamie Ross decided to go all in.
After decades of dabbling, Jamie made one bold decision, to run her photography business like it mattered. What followed was a whirlwind year of loss, courage, and $20,000 in wall portrait sales in just weeks. This isn't about hustle. It's about choosing purpose when everything feels uncertain.
Here's what you'll walk away with:
• Why running a business is a decision, not a feeling • How to sell $5K wall art with heart, not pressure • The mindset shift that turns fear into forward motion
If you've been waiting for the "right time," this is your sign. Jamie's story will remind you that you're stronger than you think, and your work is worth more than you've been charging. Press play. This one might just change everything.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You didn't start your photography business to work harder and still feel broke. But how do you actually build a life where you make real money and get to be the kind of mom you want to be? In this raw solo episode, Sarah shares the honest journey from barely breaking even to earning $3M in portrait sales—all while raising three kids.
You'll hear: • The mindset shift that made everything click (and why it matters more than talent) • How one pricing decision changed the course of her business—and her life • The system that gave her time and profit, even during economic downturns
If you're feeling like something has to give, this episode will remind you it doesn't have to be your dream. Press play and take the first step toward a better way.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're hustling, grinding, doing all the things… yet still wondering why your business isn't growing. Sound familiar? You're likely stuck in the Quicksand Zone—where hard work doesn't equal success, and burnout feels inevitable.
In this episode, Sarah breaks down the six stages of the Photographer Freedom Staircase—a proven path to escaping the struggle and building a thriving portrait business with purpose.
● Why most photographers never move past stage 3—and how to be the rare few who do ● The real reason your skills and hustle haven't translated to income ● What the "Business Breakthrough" stage actually looks like—and how to get there
If you're tired of spinning your wheels and ready for real progress, this episode is your roadmap out. You are closer than you think.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
She had the dream studio. The elaborate sets. The big heart. Jacie was doing everything right—or so she thought. But behind the Santa sessions and boutique service was a mom drowning in debt, doubt, and burnout. If you've ever wondered why working harder still leaves you broke, this episode will hit home.
Jacie opens up about the year she almost quit photography altogether. From taking out a loan just to stay afloat, to questioning her worth as a business owner and mom, she shares how learning a system—not pushing harder—completely turned things around. Now she's making $3,700 sales and, more importantly, reclaiming time with her kids.
● The mindset trap of "doing more" and how Jacie broke free ● Why selling isn't sleazy when it comes from service ● The exact moment she realized her dream wasn't dead—it just needed direction
This one's for the photographers who feel like they're giving their all and still coming up short. Jacie's story is raw, real, and full of hope. You don't need to hustle harder. You need a better plan. Start here.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Most photographers think partnering with charities is just a feel-good move. But what if it's actually your smartest marketing strategy? This episode unpacks how to use charity partnerships to tap into a stream of ideal, trust-filled clients—while doing work that matters.
You'll learn: ● How to spot high-converting charity partners (and which to avoid) ● A proven event structure that raises money and books premium clients ● Real student examples of raising $43K+ while building six-figure studios
If you're craving clients who see your value before you even pick up your camera, this episode shows you how to find them—through giving back.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're burning out trying to serve everyone with cheap digital files—and deep down, you know it's not sustainable. You're working nonstop and still not making what you deserve. But what if there were a better way?
In this episode, Sarah Petty walks you through five simple steps to price your printed portraits profitably—without scaring off clients. Drawing from her $3M portrait business, she shares how shifting to a boutique model changed everything.
● A simple pricing formula that ensures you're finally paid what you're worth ● Why giving away files is costing you more than just money ● The exact conversation that eliminates 90% of price objections
If you're ready to stop trading time for pennies and start building a business that honors your time, talent, and life—this one's for you.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
She had a studio. She knew in-person sales. But after 25 years, Elissa was hiding behind online galleries, over-editing 40 images per client, and barely scraping $700 per session. It felt easier—until it didn't. This is the story of how she rebuilt her confidence, trusted a system, and hit $142K in just six months.
Meet Elissa Bean, a seasoned photographer who almost walked away from her craft. Burned out and disconnected, she believed the lie that digitals were the only way forward. But when she joined Boutique Breakthrough, everything changed. She found her voice, her value, and a business that truly lit her up again.
● How Elissa rewired her introverted fears and started booking $3K+ clients ● The mindset shift that helped her stop "hiding" and start leading with heart ● Why fewer sessions + deeper relationships = more joy and way more profit
If you've ever wondered if it's too late to pivot—or if you're quietly burned out—Elissa's story will give you the hope and roadmap to start fresh. This episode is the permission slip your future self will thank you for.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you're selling digital files, AI is about to shake your world—and not in a good way. The future of photography isn't just coming, it's here. But the photographers who'll survive this shift aren't the most creative or even the most tech-savvy. They're the ones who understand the one thing AI can never replicate.
In this solo episode, Sarah breaks down why digital files are becoming obsolete, and how boutique photographers can rise above the AI tidal wave. From the way we serve clients to the artwork we create, everything is shifting—and if you lean in now, you can become completely AI-proof.
● Why digital files are being commoditized—and what that means for your income ● The irreplaceable magic of printed portraits and real human connection ● The 5-step boutique process that keeps AI completely irrelevant
This is more than a business strategy. It's a reminder that photography is about love, memory, and legacy—and AI can't compete with that. If you've been feeling uneasy about where the industry is headed, this episode will give you clarity, confidence, and a new path forward.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever feel like you're working so hard yet barely making a dent? Like you're doing everything and it's still not enough? This episode reveals a game-changing truth: specializing in the right portrait photography niche could be your path to real profit and a lighter schedule.
Photographer and mentor Sarah Petty unpacks the top 5 most profitable portrait niches—with real stories of students earning six figures in unexpectedly simple ways. Whether it's newborns, pets, or even tweens, these niches are transforming businesses by doing less but earning more.
● Why being a generalist is killing your profit—and how specialization builds both income and confidence ● Real-world examples of photographers making six figures in under-the-radar niches ● Which "popular" photography models to avoid if you want sustainable success
This isn't just another list of niches. It's a roadmap for building a boutique business that's joyful, profitable, and finally aligned with your life. Press play and start carving your path today.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're doing the boutique model—or so you think. But what if the system you've built is quietly holding you back from the business (and life) you really want? This episode will hit home for the photographers juggling it all and still wondering why things aren't clicking.
In this heart-opening conversation, Sarah talks with Kim Phelan, a mom of four and in-home daycare owner who thought she had boutique figured out—until she realized she didn't. After joining Boutique Breakthrough, she revamped her entire process and made $5,559 from just three portrait sessions. Her story is one of reclaiming worth, community, and the right kind of support.
● Why doing boutique "by the book" might still be costing you money and peace of mind ● The power of purpose-driven selling (and how Kim made it feel joyful, not salesy) ● How real community changes everything when you're trying to do it all alone
If you're feeling stretched thin, second-guessing your strategy, or wondering if change is really possible—this is the episode your heart's been waiting for.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Think you need a studio to charge premium prices? Think again. If you've been eyeing a lease but feeling the financial pressure, this episode might just change everything.
Sarah Petty breaks down the powerful (and profitable) truth behind the no-studio model. From her own $50K backyard session to students earning six figures as "stay-at-home photographers," Sarah reveals how ditching the overhead can elevate your business—and your life.
● The hidden costs and stress that come with studio ownership ● How serving clients in their homes creates deeper impact (and bigger orders) ● A step-by-step walkthrough of Sarah's no-studio sales process
If you've been craving freedom, profit, and proof that less really can be more—this one's for you. RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever wonder why some photographers effortlessly book $3,000 clients while others hustle for $300? Spoiler: it's not talent. It's marketing—and today, I'm sharing the single strategy that skyrocketed my studio and made competitors irrelevant. It's wildly effective, and you can start using it right now.
In this episode, I'm walking you through my "dog whistle" marketing trick—a simple, printed piece that speaks so powerfully to your dream client, they can't look away. I'm sharing the full story behind how I stumbled onto this game-changing idea, why it works better than any ad spend, and how you can copy it without spending a fortune.
● How one emotional print piece turned strangers into raving, high-spending clients ● The psychology of why "fewer, better" always wins in a crowded market ● Real-life ways to use this when bookings dry up or you just need a spark
If you've been craving a fresh way to stand out without discounting your work or burning out, this episode is your green light.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you could turn a creative side gig into $16K photographing dogs—even if you've never charged for a portrait session before?
In this episode, Felix Bird shares how he went from composing music and shooting event videos to earning real income as a boutique photographer. With no formal portrait business, Felix joined Boutique Breakthrough and followed each step with courage, skepticism, and eventually—results.
● The moment he stopped doubting the pricing model and believed he could actually do this ● How photographing kids (and dogs!) became more than just a favor for friends ● What changed when his wife, a fellow creative, saw how real and sustainable this path was
If you're juggling other creative work and wondering if this can really work for you too—Felix's story is the proof and the push you've been waiting for.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're doing everything right—working hard, upgrading your gear, chasing exposure—and yet, the bank account doesn't reflect your effort. Sound familiar? This episode is your wake-up call. It's time to ditch the myths that keep talented photographers stuck in survival mode and finally step into profit with purpose.
This week, Sarah Petty shares the $3,000 lesson that changed her business forever—and the six lies that might be costing you your dream. With raw honesty and practical wisdom, she unpacks how even the most award-winning photographers struggle when they don't have the right systems in place.
● Why talent alone won't pay the bills—and what actually does ● How "helping" your clients might be hurting your bottom line ● The mindset shift that turns exposure into strategic growth
If you've ever wondered, "Why isn't this working?"—this episode was made for you. Let it be the turning point where you stop chasing and start choosing. Press play and let's rebuild your business from truth.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You're doing everything: editing late at night, juggling clients, parenting, pricing. Yet your bank account doesn't reflect the hustle. Why? Because more clients at the wrong price doesn't mean more profit. It means burnout. If you're ready to earn more without losing yourself, this episode is your wake-up call.
This week, Sarah shares 7 portrait pricing secrets photographers aren't being told. These aren't theories. They're hard-won lessons from going broke at $75 sessions to building a profitable studio that lets her show up for life, not just work. If your schedule is full but your wallet is empty, this one's for you.
● Why more sessions = more stress, not more money (and how to flip that equation) ● The subtle pricing shift that makes clients expect to spend more ● How to stop negotiating with yourself and finally price with confidence
You don't need more clients. You need the right clients, the right system, and the courage to believe your work is worth more. Let this episode be the turning point.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You've built a business, then stepped away—maybe for kids, for a move, or to support someone else's dream. But what happens when it's your turn again? In this heartfelt episode, Amanda Cole shares how she's rebuilding her photography business from scratch after years away, and what's surprising her most along the way.
• How Amanda made 3 "Julies" from her martial arts school email list • Why trusting the process (even when it feels messy) can lead to big wins • The mindset shift that helped her finally let go of judgment and raise her prices
If you've ever wondered whether it's too late—or too complicated—to begin again, Amanda's story is the hope-filled push you need.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You love photography, but let's be honest—you didn't start this to be broke, burnt out, and missing your kids' bedtime. If you've ever questioned whether this dream is even worth it, this episode is your wake-up call.
In this week's Joycast, Sarah lays out 8 brutally honest truths that helped her go from overworked mom to profitable boutique photographer. This isn't fluff. It's a clear, courageous path to freedom, income, and the joy you thought you'd find when you picked up a camera.
● Why working harder isn't the answer—and what actually changes everything ● The mindset shift that stopped Sarah from projecting her money fears onto clients ● How to stop hoping people buy and start guiding them to say yes
If you've been spinning your wheels or second-guessing your worth, press play. This episode doesn't just inspire—it equips you with the truth to finally break through.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You don't need more followers or fancier gear—you need clients who value what you do. If you're tired of posting and praying, Sarah's sharing the 13 marketing moves that actually bring in premium clients. These strategies built her $3M business—and they're working for 32,000+ photographers today.
In this solo episode, Sarah breaks down the exact approaches that took her from overwhelmed mom to one of America's most profitable photographers. These aren't fluff tips. They're tried-and-true strategies you can start using now, no matter your experience level.
● How to turn silent auctions into high-ROI lead machines ● The "dog whistle" marketing piece that makes right-fit clients say, "I need you!" ● Why friends and family may be your most untapped marketing goldmine
If your business feels stuck—or you're ready to level up with more joy and fewer discounts—this episode is your roadmap. Take notes, take action, and start attracting clients who say yes with their hearts and wallets.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if everything you thought was holding you back—language barriers, hearing loss, no studio space—was actually setting the stage for your breakthrough? In this episode, meet Olga Filatova, a Las Vegas photographer who went from terrified to talk to clients to making $2,995 with her very first boutique order.
• How Olga overcame the fear of selling, even with hearing loss • The moment that changed her belief in her value—for good • The exact mindset shift that took her from discounts to $9K in four clients
If you've ever questioned whether this could work for you, let Olga's story be your answer. Her courage will remind you what's possible. RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me "Conversation Starters" for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Still selling digital files? It’s costing you more than just income—it’s costing your clients the heirlooms they deserve. In this episode, Sarah reveals why the digital-only model is broken, how it sets you up to lose against AI, and what to do instead if you want a business that’s profitable, sustainable, and deeply fulfilling.
• Why the digital-only model leads to burnout and low profit • The mindset and strategy shift that leads to multi-thousand-dollar orders • How to stop feeling like a “charity” and start running a real business
This isn’t just about pricing—it’s about purpose. Let this episode give you the permission (and the plan) to change everything.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if one event could change everything about how you sell? That’s exactly what happened to Jean Lachat. After sitting front row at Sarah’s summer camp and making a few small (but mighty) shifts, she walked away and booked $15,300 in a single day. Hear exactly what changed—and how you can apply it to your next session.
• How Jean’s mindset around presentation and pricing completely shifted • The “less is more” strategy that made it easy for clients to say yes • Why intentionality—not pressure—is the key to bigger, happier sales
If you’ve ever doubted your value or second-guessed your sales process, this is your must-listen.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Tired of handing off digitals for $250 and never hearing from clients again? So was Audrey Tarris. In this episode, she shares how she rebuilt her business—transforming her townhome into a boutique studio and making $10K in two months, including a $3,700 order. This is what happens when you stop winging it and follow a plan that works.
• Why ditching packages led to real profits and real relationships • How she paid off a business loan with just 10 client orders • The mindset shift that helped her stop selling from her wallet
If you’ve been stuck in the hustle, Audrey’s story is proof—you can change your life faster than you think.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Thinking about going full-time with your photography? Before you leap, listen to this. In this episode, I’m sharing the 7 lessons I wish someone had told me before I traded my 9–5 for the camera. From pricing mistakes to burnout traps, these insights could save you years—and skyrocket your income and joy.
You don’t need more hustle. You need more clarity.
• Why “busy” doesn’t mean profitable (and what to do instead) • The truth about gear, pricing, and building consistent income • How to ditch digital files and start selling artwork that actually serves your clients
This is the pep talk—and business plan—you’ve been needing.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Thinking about going full-time with your photography? Before you leap, listen to this. In this episode, I’m sharing the 7 lessons I wish someone had told me before I traded my 9–5 for the camera. From pricing mistakes to burnout traps, these insights could save you years—and skyrocket your income and joy.
You don’t need more hustle. You need more clarity.
• Why “busy” doesn’t mean profitable (and what to do instead) • The truth about gear, pricing, and building consistent income • How to ditch digital files and start selling artwork that actually serves your clients
This is the pep talk—and business plan—you’ve been needing.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if getting fired was the best thing that ever happened to you? In this raw, inspiring episode, Sarah Gardner—a single mom from a tiny town in Maine—shares how she went from broke and burned out to booking a $14K portrait order… just months after picking up a camera for the first time.
If she can do it, so can you.
• The bold mindset shift that helped her bet on herself • Why not knowing “how” can actually be your superpower • How she landed her first high-end client through a simple, real conversation
This story is your reminder that it’s never too late to begin again—with heart, grit, and a little guidance.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if just three simple words could double your portrait orders—without feeling pushy? In this episode, I’m teaching you the “by the way” technique, a powerful tool that turns happy clients into bigger sales and glowing referrals. No pressure, no gimmicks—just genuine service that transforms your bottom line.
Used right, this one phrase can change everything.
• Why “by the way” works so well—and when to say it • Real examples that added $2K+ to portrait orders • How better service leads to bigger sales (and more joy)
Try this once, and you’ll never sell the same way again.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Why are some photographers booking $10K+ portrait sessions while others struggle to get inquiries? It’s not luck, ads, or better gear. It’s strategy. In this episode, I’m sharing my 17 Clients Framework—the exact method I use to help photographers spot real-life opportunities that lead to emotional, high-value bookings.
Stop waiting. Start seeing.
• How to recognize 17 life moments that clients will pay big for • The conversation formula that leads to effortless bookings • Why solving emotional needs matters more than fancy marketing
The clients are already in your life. This framework will help you see them—and serve them—differently.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You’re booking sessions, making sales… but something still feels off. That was Kate Walton—until she traded digital packages for wall art and albums. In this episode, Kate shares how shifting to a full boutique model brought her a $6,821 sale, deeper client connections, and a business that finally feels right.
If you’re done with hustle that doesn’t fulfill you, Kate’s story will hit home.
• Why the hybrid model left her (and her clients) unfulfilled • The simple presentation shift that turned digitals into heirlooms • How she booked fewer sessions—and made more with each one
This isn’t about working harder. It’s about serving better. And that shift can change everything.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if running into a past client at the grocery store could turn into your next big booking? It’s not just possible—it’s powerful. In this episode, I’m sharing how to shift your mindset, show up with confidence, and turn everyday moments into meaningful connections that grow your business.
You don’t need a pitch. You need a plan—and I’ll walk you through it.
• The 10-minute habit that preps you for unexpected client encounters • What not to say when you recognize someone (and what to say instead) • How to gracefully guide a casual conversation into a future session or referral
You’re just one warm hello away from your next client. This episode shows you how to make it count.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Still sending online galleries and wondering why your income (and confidence) feels stuck? You’re not alone. In this episode, I’m breaking down the hard truth: galleries aren’t saving time—they’re sabotaging your sales. It’s time for a powerful mindset shift that puts you back in the driver’s seat.
We’ll unpack why ditching online galleries isn’t just good for your business—it’s transformational for you and your clients.
• Why online galleries lead to decision fatigue and unfinished orders • The myth of convenience—and the income you’re leaving on the table • How in-person sales grow your revenue and your confidence
You deserve a business that honors your time, your talent, and your worth. Let this episode be the turning point.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you could go from $150 sessions and burnout… to $2,651 sales and peace of mind? Homeschooling mom Natalie Delgado did exactly that. After years of running on empty, she said yes to herself—and redefined her business, her worth, and her confidence.
In this inspiring conversation, Natalie shares how Boutique Breakthrough helped her step into the photographer she was meant to be.
• Why $150 sessions were draining her—and what finally made her stop • The moment everything clicked (and she made her first $2,651 sale) • How she gained the confidence to say no to low-paying work—for good
If you’ve ever wondered, “Can I really do this?”—this episode will make you believe you can.
RESOURCES: Photography Business Tools to Get Started
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Does your social media say “pro photographer”… or “confused hobbyist”? If your profiles are cluttered, unclear, or missing the magic that makes clients say yes, this episode is your reset. I’m teaching you the CLEAN formula—a 5-step audit to help you attract dream clients and present your work like a high-end pro.
We’re not just talking about pretty feeds. We’re talking strategy—what to keep, what to cut, and how to stand out in a scroll-happy world.
• Why your profile pic must include a camera • The “label” mistake that’s costing you clients • How to post with purpose and proof you're in demand
Your dream clients are watching. Let’s make sure what they see builds trust and shows your worth. Start CLEAN today.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you’re serious about growing your photography business (and I mean really growing it) not staying stuck in the shoot-and-burn cycle… This new episode is a can’t miss!
When I finally cracked six figures in my business, it wasn’t because I had more followers, ran ads, or had a studio. It was because I got laser-focused on three key numbers that told me exactly what was working… and what wasn’t.
I’m giving you real, boutique-friendly numbers you can plug into your business today to start building a more profitable, sustainable photography career.
If you’re ready to stop guessing and start scaling with strategy, not hustle, I’ll meet you in this week’s episode!
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you've ever packed up your gear, driven an hour to a session, worked your magic, came home to edit into the night, and then got paid something that barely covers gas and groceries…
This week’s Joycast is going to hit home.
Rachel’s been in business 12 years. She lives on a farm. Her days include feeding animals, raising a family, and her photography business. For years, her sessions barely paid off. She was doing all the things (minis, digitals, discounts) and still felt stuck.
In this new episode, Rachel opens up about how she slowly (and imperfectly) went from $600 sessions to a whopping $4,000 portrait order. Plus:
- How to finally let go of discounts and start owning your value
- What mindset shift gets you unstuck (There’s no going back at this point)
- The secret to making your boutique model click for you (and your clients)
Grab your coffee, take a walk, and press play on this one. You deserve a business that works with your life like Rachel.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you’re tired of awkward sales pitches and sliding into potential client’s DMs just to get ghosted, this week’s Joycast is something special just for you.
In this new episode, I break down the “7-11-4 Framework.” A coveted method photographers use to build trust and visibility using everyday places you're already showing up at. Think pizza fundraisers, yoga class, Target runs, or after school events.
We discuss:
- What the “7-11-4 Framework” is and why it works wonders for photographers
- How to turn casual interactions into client bookings
- Real examples of using errands and local events as marketing advantages
- Why you don’t need to be pushy to be profitable
If you’ve ever felt awkward “selling” yourself, this episode will give you a confident way to grow your business without sacrificing your family time or sanity.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if your next client isn’t scrolling on Instagram but standing behind you at school pickup or laying on the yoga mat next to yours?
On this week’s Joycast, I’m walking you through why paid ads often flop and how to replace them with something way more personal and effective: the 7-11-4 framework.
Inside this episode, you’ll learn:
- Why social media ads are designed for big brands (not boutique photographers)
- A simpler marketing approach that grows with you (not against you)
- How to use errands to stay visible, build trust, and attract ideal clients
If you’re tired of burning money on unpredictable social media ads, this episode is for you!
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
After 15 years of undercharging and hiding behind text, pet photographer Sandy hit her limit. Tired of selling from her wallet and burned out on fear-pricing, she decided it was time for a change. If you’re stuck in self-doubt, afraid to raise prices (or dodging client calls for emails) this week’s Joycast will provide the clarity you’re craving.
Join us as we discuss:
- The cost of staying small and how to finally let go
- Why accountability and structure were Sally’s missing pieces
- How to turn fear into confidence for larger sales
- The power of printed artwork and why clients want it more than files
Your work deserves to be seen, valued, and paid well for. It’s time you step into the business you were meant to lead.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
This week we’re busting the “all debt is bad” myth and setting the record straight! If no one has told you this before, I’ll happily be the first:
Borrowing money doesn’t mean you’re behind, it means you’re building.
In this new episode, we’re kicking shame, blame, and guilt to the curb for a fresh, feel-good way to look at growing your photography business. Here’s a sneak peek:
-
5 head-trash myths about loans that keep photographers stuck (including “I’ll wait until I can pay cash” and “Needing a loan means I’ve failed”)
-
How to treat a loan like an investment because putting $1 in and getting $3 out isn’t debt, it’s growth!
-
The banker who might just change your life (and how to find one who cheers for your business as hard as I do.)
-
2 simple steps you can take this week to get set up for the kind of growth that feels doable, exciting, and not overwhelming.
You don’t have to hustle harder or wait until everything’s “perfect” to grow.
If you’re ready to invest in yourself and your business (but need a little guidance to get there) this episode will give you the clarity and confidence you’ve been craving.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Does it feel like you're doing everything “right” as a photographer like hustling hard, offering mini sessions, delivering digital files, yet you're still scraping by?
This week on the Joycast, I’m sharing the story of Sarah Lang Schroeder. She’s a pet photographer who spent over a decade dabbling while juggling a full-time job.
Sarah thought success meant saying “yes” to everything but after one change, she was able to ditch perfectionism, embrace action, and build a profitable business that brings her true joy.
Join us as we talk through:
- Why imperfect action beats perfect inaction every single time
- How ditching mini sessions led to a $1,798 sale (yes, from ONE session!)
- What finally gave Sarah the confidence to go all-in
If you’ve ever felt too scared to believe this business could work for you, this episode is the proof you need to move forward.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You booked the session, nailed the shoot, and now it’s time to… Sell. 😬 If you're like most photographers I coach, this is the moment where your confidence fizzles.
This week on the Joycast, I’m revealing the final two blinders that hold photographers back from profit. These are the differences between barely scraping by and creating a client experience that leaves everyone (yes, even you!) crying happy tears.
Join me as I share:
- Why fewer, better images create more impact and more sales
- The simple order-of-operations that can make your slideshow irresistible
- How emotional storytelling transforms your work into fine art (and justifies boutique pricing)
If you’ve ever dreaded the sales part of your business or felt overwhelmed trying to “do it all,” this episode is your guide to more joy, confidence, and a surplus of clients saying “Yes!”
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You’ve spent years building a photography business: the bookings, the workflow, the income. But what happens when the version of success you built no longer aligns with the life you’re living?
This week on the Joycast, Kayla Brint opens up about the unraveling that led her to step away from her booming portrait studio. Not because she failed, but because she changed. Join us as we discuss:
- The role grief, motherhood, and burnout play in reshaping your definition of success
- Why trusting your gut can lead to a more meaningful career
- How to know when it’s time to pivot, even if everything looks great on the outside
If you’re craving permission to make a change or lead your passion with deeper intention, Kayla’s story will meet you right where you are.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Feeling overwhelmed? Stuck in a cycle of working nonstop and still not getting where you want to be? Melissa Holkeabor knows exactly how that feels. Juggling a full-time nursing job, a photography business, and two kids, she was exhausted and burnt out. But then a major health scare forced her to make a change.
On this week’s Joycast we discuss:
- How Melissa went from an overworked nurse to a successful photographer
- The reason “digital file” was keeping her stuck
- How one shift helped her cut working hours and finally be there for her family
If you’ve been dreaming of a life with more freedom, joy, and profit (without sacrificing your sanity) this episode will show you it’s possible.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Tired? Uninspired? Does it feel like you’re doing all the things yet you’re still not making what you deserve? I know what it’s like to feel stuck in the grind and wonder if anything is actually working. The good news is Spring is the perfect time to shake things up and breathe new life into your photography business.
Here’s a sneak peek of the 7 tips I swear by to fall back in love with your calling:
🧡 The truth about clients who are ready to pay boutique prices 🧡 What to do when you’re stuck in comparison mode 🧡 How to reconnect with your “why” and let it fuel your fire 🧡 The one shift that helps you stop serving the wrong people
If you’re ready to feel excited again and start loving your business like you did when you first started, this episode is your fresh start.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
37 CLIENTS WHO CAN HIRE YOU TODAY https://info.photographybusinessinstitute.com/37-clients-optin INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
In a slump and can’t claw your way out? I’ve been there too many times but I’ve found surprising inspiration from one unexpected little creature…
The squirrel. 🐿️
Yeah, seriously! These furry little creatures hold 5 big lessons we could all learn from. Here’s a sneak peek:
🧡 What squirrels teach us about fun (and why you NEED more of it)
🧡 Why preparing now keeps your business from freezing up later
🧡 How being “small” is actually your advantage
🧡 Why community isn’t optional (it's the safety net you didn’t know you needed)
If your photography business needs a little spark (or a total reset), this one’s for you. Let’s squash the slump together, one acorn at a time!
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
Join thousands of photographers in our “We Are Portrait Photographers” Facebook Group: Click here to join!
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS https://www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
If you’ve ever felt stuck between wanting more for your business and the fear of actually going after it, you’re not alone (and you’re not broken.)
The friction you’re feeling might be the very sign that you’re on the right path.
On this week’s Joycast, I’m joined by photographer Tassie Winters for a real talk about self-doubt, imposter syndrome, and how fear shows up when we’re stepping into something bigger.
In this new episode, you’ll understand:
- Why fear and resistance are normal when you’re growing
- The surprising way journaling can help break through a lifetime of self-doubt
- How pushing past “I’m not good enough” led Tassie to a six-figure studio (without burning out)
Plus, Tassie shares how she ditched hustle culture, moved into full-time photography, and created a business that’s both profitable and peaceful.
If you’re craving more purpose and confidence in your photography journey, this one’s for you.
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE: Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/photographybusinessinstitute
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you're a parent balancing photography and kids, you know how rewarding (and overwhelming) it can be at times. But harmony is possible!
On this week’s Joycast, we’re chatting about what it takes to balance both without sacrificing your sanity. Plus, three hacks to run your business and show up for your family without feeling like one is being neglected.
Here’s a sneak peek:
- How to create a dedicated workspace that keeps boundaries clear
- Why multitasking is sabotaging your success (and what to do instead)
- A quick mindset shift to transition between “work mode” and “mom mode”
Plus, I’m sharing personal stories and practical tips to make it all feel a little easier and more relatable. If you’re ready to stop feeling spread thin and start enjoying both sides of your world, click play now!
RESOURCES: Show Notes: Click here.
Episode Transcript: Click here.
Join thousands of photographers in our “We Are Portrait Photographers” Facebook Group: Click here to join!
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS https://www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/freebook
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.photographybusinessinstitute.com/boutiquebreakthrough
If it feels like every step forward is met with fear, doubt, or procrastination, resistance might be holding you back.
But here’s the good news: recognizing it is the first step to overcoming it.
On this week’s Joycast, we’re talking about how resistance sneaks into your business, how to spot its lies, and most importantly how to eliminate it.
Inside this episode, you’ll learn:
- Why resistance shows up when you’re chasing big goals (hint: it’s actually a good sign!)
- The four sneaky forms resistance takes (and how to spot them fast)
- Practical tips to silence your head trash and start moving forward with confidence
Plus, I’m sharing stories from photographers who faced resistance and won, some hit six figures in small towns!
If you’re ready to stop procrastinating and start building the photography business you’ve been dreaming of, let’s chat.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-256
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Are you grinding away in your photography business, shooting tons of sessions, but barely making a profit? If so, you’re in the same situation Adam was. Until he made one decision that changed everything…
On this week’s Joycast, we’re pulling back the curtain on how one photographer ditched the exhausting volume model, embraced the boutique system, and started landing $2K+ orders with ease.
Inside this episode, you’ll learn: The pricing mistakes that kept Adam stuck in low-value shoots. The simple mindset shift that helped him attract higher-paying clients. How he finally broke free from burnout (and how you can too.)
The truth is you don’t need to work harder to make more money. You just need a better system. Click play now and let’s talk about how to build a photography business that pays you what you’re worth!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-255
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Are you the “Black Diamond” in your photography community?
If you feel like you’re doing all the right things in your photography business (but you are still getting overlooked) no matter how beautiful your images are, clients keep choosing the cheaper photographer down the street…
Today, we’re changing that!
On this week’s Joycast, I’m breaking down what Black Diamonds can teach us about standing out, owning our value, and attracting clients who are excited to pay boutique prices.
Inside this episode, you’ll learn:
💎 Why looking different is better than trying to be “perfect”. 💎 The #1 mistake photographers make when marketing themselves (and what to do instead!) 💎 How to position yourself as the must-have photographer in your market.
The truth? Your business isn’t struggling because of cheaper photographers in your area. It’s because you haven’t fully owned what makes you unique.
Click play now and let’s chat about how to make your business shine like the Black Diamond it is!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-254
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever wondered what separates the photographers making six figures from the ones struggling to book clients?
In this week’s Joycast, I’m pulling back the curtain on 3 photographers who hit $100K for the first time and they’re sharing EXACTLY what made the difference in their businesses.
Listen now to get the scoop on:
- The #1 mindset shift that helped them push past fear and take action.
- The simple daily habits that kept them on track to hit six figures.
- The biggest mistakes they stopped making (so you can avoid them too!)
These photographers aren’t unicorns. They’re just like you. The only difference? They committed to a couple key things and it worked.
If you’re ready to stop playing the trial-and-error game and finally build the photography business of your dreams, click play now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-253
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Dyslexic, Determined, and Thriving: How Hosanna Built Her Photography Business
Have you ever felt like the odds were stacked against you? Like you didn’t have the right background, connections, or experience to build a successful photography business?
In this week’s Joycast, I’m sitting down with Hosanna Hale. She’s an Anchorage-based outdoor portrait photographer. Despite starting with no website, no pricing, and only two paid shoots under her belt, she went on to land multiple high-dollar clients!
We discuss:
- How Hosanna went from charging $50 for friends to landing a $14K sale
- The mindset shift that helped her take action
- Why investing in one thing helped her grow faster than a traditional photography degree
If you’ve ever doubted whether you have what it takes to build a profitable photography business, Hosanna’s story will give you the confidence boost you need!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-252
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you’re like most photographers, you’re juggling two of the most rewarding (and sometimes overwhelming) jobs in the world…
Being a photographer and a parent.
There’s no perfect handbook for either, but I’ve learned a thing or two about balancing both without feeling like you’re failing at one or the other. In this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing advice to help you switch gears, get more done, and show up fully for your family and your photography business!
You’ll learn:
- How to create a workspace that helps you focus (even in a house full of chaos!)
- The secret to setting boundaries so you can actually work during work hours
- A simple habit that helps you shift from work mode to family mode without the stress
You don’t have to choose between being a great parent and a successful photographer. You can have both! This episode will show you how to create structure, protect your time, and run your business with more joy and less guilt.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-251
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Networking. Just hearing the word makes you cringe, right?
You’re already juggling a full-time job, raising kids, and managing a million other responsibilities… How are you supposed to squeeze in business networking, too?
But what if I told you that you don’t need more time to mingle? You just need a better strategy!
On this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing my simple, 5-minute networking strategy that helps you turn everyday interactions into golden business opportunities (without awkward small talk, forced conversations, or spending hours at suit and tie events.)
Join me as we discuss:
- How to naturally connect with potential clients in your daily routine
- The #1 mistake photographers make when trying to build relationships
- The small mindset shift that will make networking feel effortless
- How to get people excited about your work without feeling salesy
Plus:
- How I built a six-figure photography business through simple conversations
- The secret to making potential clients ask you about your photography services
- A step-by-step challenge to help you start networking today
If you’re tired of waiting for clients to find you and want advice that actually works (without taking over your life), this episode is for you!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-250
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever booked a client then immediately felt that little knot in your stomach…
In this week’s Joycast, I’m revealing the 3 types of red-flag clients that can drain your energy, steal your joy, and make you question why you started your photography business in the first place.
You’ll learn:
🚩The one thing chronic client complainers say 🚩 Why “rock throwers” are the sneakiest energy vampires (and how to sidestep them.) 🚩How to avoid getting caught up in drama (and keep your business FUN!)
You don’t have to say yes to everyone. You deserve to work with clients who light you up and value what you do. So if you’ve ever second-guessed a booking, this episode is your permission slip to trust your gut!
Grab your favorite drink, get comfy, and let’s talk about how to protect your happiness while growing your photography business.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-249
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Braving freezing temperatures without a studio can feel like a huge challenge for photographers, but what if I told you it’s actually a secret weapon…
In this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing 8 creative ways to keep your calendar full in the chilliest weather. Here's a sneak peek:
- Why not having a studio isn't the end of the world (and how you can use it to your advantage.)
- Tips for turning everyday spaces into stunning, boutique-worthy backdrops.
-
How to stay creative and confident (no matter the weather.)
-
The one shift that will make you rethink how you approach studio spaces entirely.
If winter weather has you feeling stuck, grab a hot cup of tea (or coffee) and join me for some fresh ideas! ❄️📸
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-248
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever thought about what it feels like to be the client instead of the photographer? On this week’s Joycast, I’m pulling back the curtain on a personal experience: my daughter’s wedding.
For once, I wasn’t the one behind the lens, and let me tell you… It gave me a whole new perspective on what we do as photographers. Here’s a sneak peek:
- The whirlwind of planning a budget-friendly wedding in six months (Did I mention it was during hurricane season?!)
- What it was like to let go of my camera and savor every moment of the big day as a mom.
- The emotions of seeing the final photos and video (and how they became the most priceless part of the entire event!)
Plus:
- A fresh perspective on what it’s like on the client's side of photography.
- The truth about digital files and why printed albums and artwork become lifelong treasures.
- What this experience taught me about the emotional journey our clients go through when they invest in photography.
This week’s episode is a reminder of why what we do as photographers is so much bigger than just “taking pictures.” Photography is about love, legacy, and creating something people will treasure forever.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-247
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Ever wonder if the boutique photography model works just as well for men as it does for women? It’s a question that came up in my recent Boutique Breakthrough workshop, and in this week’s Joycast, we’re shedding light on the truth.
Here’s a sneak peek:
- How Ryan Vinson leverages sports photography and auctions to dominate his local senior market (with 95% of his clients being boys!)
- Adam’s journey to raising his prices and building a profitable boutique business.
- Andy’s story of escaping the shoot-and-burn model to create a year-round income while staying present for his family.
- Reggie’s creative networking strategies (like turning team banners into marketing gold.)
Plus:
- The unique challenges male photographers face and how they’re overcoming them.
- Real-life examples of how connection, visibility, and networking make all the difference in boutique photography.
Whether you’re just starting out or looking for fresh strategies to market your photography, this episode is packed with inspiring stories and actionable tips to grow your boutique photography business.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-246
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Does it seem like the only people who hire you for photos are bargain hunters or family?
I know how suffocating that can feel. You pour your heart into your photography, but you’re left wondering if there’s anyone out there who truly values your work.
In this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing how to break out of that bubble, connect with the right clients, and build a photography business full of customers who value your worth.
Here’s how we’re flipping the script for 2025 and starting fresh:
-
I’ll bust the myths about “magic button” solutions and share how a few basics will set you up for long-term success.
-
Want clients who value your work and pay you well? I’ll show you how to get closer to the right people and why proximity matters for building your business.
-
You don’t need to overhaul your life to connect with potential clients. I’ll explain how small steps, like inviting a friend for coffee or starting conversations at your kid’s activities can open big doors.
-
It’s all about choosing the right opportunities! I’ll tell you how to filter what aligns with your goals so you don’t end up overwhelmed and burnt out.
Let’s make 2025 your year! It’s a clean slate, and with a few habits, you can change everything.
Ready to start building relationships with clients who value your artistry?
Hit play, and let’s talk photographer friend!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-245
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Oh New Year’s resolutions… Are they a hopeful tradition, or a fast-track to feeling defeated by February?
In this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing why I think resolutions often set us up for failure and what I’m doing instead to create real, lasting progress as we step into a brand-new year. Here’s a sneak peek:
- Why starting your day with a “fresh sheet of ice” can be the habit you need.
- The power of gratitude reflections (and how to turn failures into your best teachers.)
- My secret weapon for setting intentions that actually stick (spoiler alert: it’s a word, not a list!)
- The creative joy of vision boards and why I make this a must-do every year.
Plus, I share personal stories from recovering after a tough skiing accident to redefining what “family first” means as my kids grow into their own amazing careers.
If you’re ready to move past the pressure of resolutions and create a year filled with clarity, creativity, and purpose, this Joycast episode is packed with practical tips and heartfelt insights to help you get there.
Let’s embrace progress (not perfection) as we focus on what truly matters in our lives and businesses this new year.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-244
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Feeling burned out or stuck in your photography business? One thing can change your work, your profits, and your life (and it might not be what you expect…)
On this week’s Joycast, I’m chatting with a Stockton, California photographer who went from shooting 120 sessions a year to embracing a boutique business model that brought her more time, joy, and income than ever!
Here’s a little of what we’ll cover:
- Why high-volume sessions might be holding you back from real profits
- The biggest mindset hurdle photographers face when raising prices
- How to transition clients to a boutique model (without losing them!)
- The power of finding the right clients who value your work
Plus:
- Stories of clients who happily paid 3x more than before
- How to let go of fear and embrace your worth
- Practical tips to reclaim your time and create a business you love
If you’re ready to stop chasing endless sessions and start building a profitable, sustainable photography business, this episode is packed with inspiration and actionable advice to get you there.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-243
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever sat at your desk late at night, exhausted from editing photos, you peek at your neverending to-do list and wonder why all this hard work doesn’t add up to more joy or money?
On this week's Joycast, I share something that’s helped so many of my students save money and make their photography businesses feel easier to manage.
The secret? Tax deductions. I know, I know. Tax stuff might sound boring, but trust me, it’s a lifesaver once you get it. I’ll explain::
- What tax write-offs really mean (it’s not as confusing as it sounds!)
- How to put savings back into your business to make life a little easier
- Simple, real-life examples of how this works so it all makes sense
Imagine writing off the gear you’ve been eyeing, saving money on things you’re already paying for, and feeling less stressed about your finances! Grab a cup of coffee (or wine), settle in, and let’s chat about how to make your money work for you in your photography business.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-242
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Feeling a little stuck or frustrated with your photography business? There’s one simple mindset shift that can make all the difference (and it’s something the happiest photographers I know do all the time.)
In this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing a lesson that changed my life, both as a mom of athletes and as a photography coach. I’ll show you how to stop getting caught up in comparison and start finding more joy in the day-to-day of building your business.
Here’s a little of what we’ll cover:
- Why learning to love the process matters just as much as reaching your goals
- How to stay motivated, even when you’re not “crushing it”
- The small habits happy photographers lean on to keep growing
- Practical ways to bring more joy (and profit!) into your business
Plus:
- Stories of photographers who turned obstacles into triumphs
- A peek into a key coaching program and its $23M success story
- Inspiration to stop dabbling and start seeing results
If you’ve ever wondered how to build a business you love (while loving the journey to get there) this episode is full of inspiration and encouragement to keep you moving forward.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-241
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Turning a passion into a profitable business isn’t always easy, especially when you’re juggling challenges. But what happens when you finally find the key to making it all work?
In this week’s Joycast, we’re sharing the incredible story of Lisa Deaton, a Cincinnati-based photographer who spent decades experimenting with her craft before booking her first $1,120 “Julie.” Lisa shares how she shifted from a hobbyist mindset to building a sustainable business, all while navigating the challenges of being a military spouse.
Here's a sneak peek:
- The pivotal moment that changed everything for Lisa’s photography business
- How to shift from a “just for fun” approach to running a profitable business
- Secrets to guiding clients through the ordering process with confidence
- The mindset changes that helped Lisa turn her passion into a steady income
Plus:
- Real-life lessons Lisa learned while creating her photography business
- Practical advice for photographers who want to level up their client experience
- A dose of inspiration for anyone on the journey of turning their dreams into reality
If you’ve ever wondered how to make your creative passion a reliable source of income, this episode is packed with tips, lessons, and encouragement to help you get there.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-240
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Being a solo photographer can feel like you’re wearing all the hats: juggling gear, lighting, and making sure your clients feel comfortable. It’s easy to get overwhelmed and even forget a few things.
In this week’s Joycast, I’m sharing my favorite tips for photographers who are doing it all on their own. Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve been running your business for years, this episode is packed with tips to help you feel more confident and supported during your sessions.
Here's a sneak peek:
- How to turn clients into joyful “helpers” without feeling weird about asking
- Easy ways to use reflectors when you don’t have an assistant (yes, even outside!)
- Tips for creating a fun, relaxed vibe during your sessions—no stress allowed!
- The secret to managing emotions and energy so you get those magical shots
Plus:
- Real stories from my early days when I was doing it all on my own (sound familiar?)
- Simple tricks to lighten your load and make your clients love their experience
If you’ve ever felt the pressure of running a photography session solo, this episode is like a warm hug and a pep talk all in one. You don’t have to do it perfectly, you just have to make it joyful.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-239
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
After years of struggling with low-paying clients and working long hours, Amy Marlin made a remarkable change: earning six figures in under a year by shifting her approach to her photography business.
In this week’s Joycast, we’re talking about the “cost of inaction” and how it may be holding you back from reaching your full potential. This episode will help you uncover hidden ways to reclaim your time, boost your income, and bring more joy to your life.
Join us as we discuss:
- What the “catch-22 business” trap is and how to escape it
- The importance of valuing your time and charging what you’re worth
- How small changes—like pre-session consultations—can lead to big results
- Why a simple sales system can save time while improving client relationships
Plus:
- Real-life examples of photographers who turned their side hustle into thriving businesses
- How to create a photography business that supports your family instead of stealing time from them
If you’re ready to work smarter (not harder) and finally build a profitable photography business that works for you, this episode is the push you need!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-238
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
After 12 years of chasing $700 orders, Claudia made an astonishing turn around...Booking multiple $2,000+ sales and topping $30,000 in a single month.
In this week's Joycast, we’re chatting with Claudia Powell. Her story shows how big a difference in the right approach can make, especially when you’re in a specialized niche like equine photography.
Join us as we talk about:
- The moment Claudia realized that raising her prices could actually help her clients
- How pre-session consultations changed her business (and her client relationships)
- What happened when she shifted away from the digital-only mindset
- Why a simple sales system made even Zoom ordering sessions feel easy, personal, and stress-free
Plus, Claudia shares:
- Why letting go of “sticker shock” was the best decision she ever made
- How she started seeing her services as an experience, not just a photo package
If you’re looking for a way to bring more joy and profit to your business, Claudia’s story might be just the push you need.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-237
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Are you struggling to stand out in a crowded photography market?In this week's Joycast, I'm discussing a crucial strategy that helped me build a profitable photography business over the last 26 years. I’ll share how creating custom holiday cards turned my passion into a client magnet and kept my photography studio at the forefront of people’s minds all year long.Join me for: * The surprising power of holiday cards to generate referrals and client loyalty * Why one client carried my Christmas card for months * Tips for designing a holiday card that’s irresistible and memorable * Strategies to make your card feel personal and impactful, creating lifelong clients
You'll also learn about: * The value of investing time and creativity in high-quality printed pieces * Why a simple holiday card can differentiate you from amateur photographers * How to stay top of mind with clients in a genuine, non-intrusive way
Ready to make this holiday season your most profitable yet?Get inspired and start planning your unique holiday card with me. And if you're interested in a free masterclass where I break down this strategy in detail, send me a DM on Instagram! (@Sarah Petty)RESOURCES: Worth Every Penny Joycast Show Notes: [LINK] Show Transcript: Click HereJoin our free Facebook community at “We Are Portrait Photographers” for more inspiration and support. RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-236
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Feeling like the photography world is overcrowded? With over 114,000 photographers in the U.S. alone, it’s easy to think the market is too saturated to stand out.
But what if I told you that more competition can actually help your business? In this week's Joycast, I’m sharing a fresh perspective on competition, inspired by my days in advertising and the bustling Diamond District in New York City.
You’ll learn:
- Why competition can actually attract more clients in photography - How most photographers are hiding and why that’s your opportunity to shine - The key to setting yourself apart and standing out in a crowded market
If you’ve been struggling to book clients and wondering if there are just too many photographers out there, hit play and discover how to flip the script and make competition work for you, not against you.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-235
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you’ve ever felt unhappy with the way your photography business is working, this week's Joycast is for you.I’m joined by Jess Curren, a mom of three who paused her photography business to travel with her family in an Airstream for five years before relaunching her passion. Jess opens up about: * Restarting her photography business and quickly realizing the digital file model wasn’t for her * Reinventing herself as a boutique portrait photographer and making $22,000 in a short period * Balancing family life with running a successful photography business * The importance of trusting your gut and knowing when to pivot
If you're looking for inspiration on RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-234
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you've ever struggled to make your photography passion profitable while juggling life’s responsibilities, you need to tune into this Joycast episode right now!I sit down with Crystal Cooper Riley, a full-time athletic trainer and single mom whose been passionate about photography since high school. Despite her love for the craft, she's spent years trying to make it a sustainable business while raising her six-year-old son.Crystal opens up about: * The challenges of balancing a demanding career, family life, and photography * How she stayed committed to her passion through difficult times * The one simple change that led to her first life-changing $6,194 photography order * Why mindset and strategy are key to unlocking your potential, even with a busy schedule
If you’re seeking motivation to pursue your creative goals, no matter how hectic life gets, hit play and get ready to be inspired! RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-233
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you've ever felt alone or unsupported in your photography journey, this episode is for you.
Today, I'm joined by two of my Peak Performance Coaching students, Allie Cline and Jenn White, who found an unexpected friendship and support system through our program.
These two amazing photographers get candid about:
- The challenges of finding genuine friendships in a competitive industry
- Transitioning to a boutique model and facing negativity from peers
- Balancing family life with growing a photography business
- The importance of having a support system that understands your goals
- How their friendship has impacted both their businesses and personal lives
So if you're looking for inspiration on how to find your tribe in the photography world and build a business that aligns with your values, hit play and get ready to feel uplifted!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-232
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
you feeling stuck in the cycle of holiday mini sessions and digital file delivery?
Today, I'm excited to introduce you to Alicia Sorenson, a mom of seven who transformed her photography business using the boutique model we teach at the Photography Business Institute.
In this episode, I sit down with Alicia to discuss:
- How she went from dabbling in photography to landing a $1,700 order
- The challenges of balancing family life with entrepreneurial dreams
- Overcoming fears and self-doubt to embrace a new business model
- The power of guided support and community in business growth
- Why the boutique model is a game-changer for photographers seeking profitability and fulfillment
You'll hear how Alicia:
- Shifted away from time-consuming digital file editing
- Found the courage to approach clients with confidence
- Leveraged our Boutique Breakthrough program to uplevel her business
Whether you're a seasoned pro or just starting out, Alicia's story will inspire you to rethink your photography business model and tap into your true earning potential.
Ready to transform your own photography business?
Don't miss my upcoming 5-day Booking Boost challenge starting September 30, 2024.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-231
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Want to take your photography sales to the next level? This episode is your backstage pass to a $10,000 sales presentation!
I recently had the incredible opportunity to demonstrate my sales process to a group of photography students at our summer camp. Today, I'm sharing the biggest takeaways from five of these students who watched me in action. Whether you're a seasoned pro or just starting out, their insights will transform your approach to sales presentations.
We're covering game-changing strategies like:
- How to present pricing without causing sticker shock
- The power of visual aids in enhancing your photography sessions
- Why projecting photos can create an emotional connection with clients
- The importance of staying focused on emotion rather than pricing during sales
- How introducing albums early can lead to larger sales
- The strategic value of having a pre-planned sales approach
Plus, I'll reveal my secret technique for including easily removable items in your presentation to empower clients and maintain higher overall sales.
So if you want to learn how to confidently conduct sales presentations that serve your clients and boost your bottom line, hit play and get ready to revolutionize your photography business!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-230
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Want to shorten your ordering appointment learning curve and keep calm during sales conversations? This is the episode for you…
Today I'm spilling the beans about what I did WRONG with a client, with 60 professionals (photographers were watching me).
My mistake got me thinking about other missteps I’ve had in my career, so I sat down to share them ALL with you!
We’re covering things like:
- Staying calm if you miss an important step in the process.
- How to strike the perfect balance of talking and listening while selling.
- Why it’s critical to avoid assuming during a sale.
- What to do if you accidentally delete something the client wanted.
- How to avoid opening a “can of worms” that leads to overwhelm in an ordering appointment.
- The best way to get TOP DOLLAR for your photography and make sure your client leaves feeling served.
So if you want to learn how to elegantly solve any sales problem and make a happy client, hit play and get ready to feel empowered!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-229
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you need to use photography to provide for your family, but are worried about working too much and sacrificing time with them, this episode is for you.
Today I’m joined by Madeleine Fenton, who, on the heels of a divorce, used photography to provide for herself and her daughter.
She gets candid about things like:
- Finding right-fit clients in a small town.
- Investing in her business when it hadn’t made much yet.
- Transitioning from digital files to the boutique model.
- Feeling stressed, tired, and like she wasn’t doing enough as a mom while she was building her photography business.
- Building her confidence in sales.
So if you want to take your photography business seriously and hear from someone who took action even when it felt scary, hit play and get ready to feel inspired!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-228
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
One of my students recently sold $10,000 of photography in one day, and it got me thinking about what it REALLY takes to sell at that level–especially when you’re starting from scratch.
Most photographers think it’s all about their photography, but there’s actually a lot more involved in selling your art for thousands of dollars.
The thing is, if you don't have a strategy for helping clients make their decisions, or you don't understand sales psychology, your orders are probably all over the place and unpredictable.
So today, I’m going to:
- Take you behind-the-scenes of my client’s TWO sessions (that in total generated $10,000 in one day)
- Walk you through my thought process when a client says, “Sarah, just help me make my house look amazing!”
- My file naming system that greatly reduces overwhelm.
- The easiest way to give a client momentum during an ordering session.
- My response if a client is surprised by the price of my photography.
So if you want to feel confident about your selling process, hit play and let me take you behind-the-scenes!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-227
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever wondered what it would be like if we teamed up? If YOU did the photography and I did the selling?
Every summer, we invite our Peak Performance Coaching students to one of our students' studios somewhere around the country. We've only done it twice, but it was such a hit last year that everybody was itching to do it again!
The deal is that the host photographer is responsible for getting the client and doing the session… and I do the presentation.
Amy Yang (a student and coach leader in our Peak Performance Coaching program) was our host photographer recently, and we had such a fun journey working together!
I want to tell you all about it because:
- Amy has great insights about feeling the PRESSURE to get a client (and the right client, at that).
- How she expertly ran a session with two parents and two children (5 and 7).
- The difference between how Amy photographs and how I photograph and what that meant during the sales process.
- How I got the client comfortable and let them know I'm there to help them.
- We go deep into supporting a client while they’re feeling emotional.
So if you want to deep dive into the presentation process and feel inspired to make your own big sales, grab a cup of tea and hit play!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-226
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If your photography is a “side hustle” or you’re trying to balance family life and work life, then this episode is for you.
Liz Schmidt, mom of two young kiddos, was trying to do it all and finding herself missing key moments at home.
During her transition from physical therapist to full-time boutique photographer, she dealt with things like:
- Wondering if she had enough business knowledge to make the shift.
- Trying to mimic what other photographers in her area were doing (and feeling frustrated when it didn’t work).
- Wanting to give so much to her clients but feeling like she needed to get them “in and out” so she could make enough money.
- Giving up her “guaranteed” income and wondering where the money was going to come from every month.
- Talking to her spouse about leaving her job to become a photographer.
- Taking action and refusing to get stuck in learning mode.
- Investing in education she needed to make her photography business a success.
- Working in her business part-time so she can be with her family and put them first.
I’ll spoil the ending for you… in her first year with us, she nearly tripled what she brought in the previous year when she was trying to do it on her own with mini sessions and digital files.
So if you want to make the shift from side hustle to full-time (or part-time) just like Liz did, hit play and get ready to feel inspired!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-225
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever wondered if the branding for your photography business is up to snuff?
Maybe you see everyone else’s websites and social media and compare your own…
Maybe you’ve developed a few different logos for yourself and nothing ever really stuck…
Or maybe marketing totally overwhelms you and you wonder if you’re even going in the right direction with your brand…
Today I’m sharing the top 3 marketing faux pas to AVOID as a portrait photographer.
Tune in to learn things like like:
- My biggest marketing takeaways from working at a large agency and at Coca-Cola.
- The weird way people make a nearly instant determination about how professional you are.
- One of the top things I look for in a brand (that photographers often miss).
- What your brand actually is–not just colors and logos.
- Why I actually DON’T recommend automating everything (yes, even nowadays with AI and all kinds of fancy tools).
So if you want to uplevel your brand as a boutique portrait photographer and start showing up as professionally as possible, hit play and get ready to take notes!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-224
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Do you want more referrals and partnerships in your photography business but feel STUCK when it comes to actually getting them?
Maybe you feel desperate when you’re approaching them…
Or maybe you feel like you’re drowning and it’s hard to invest in someone else's business…
I recently went on a trip with my photography group (The Society of XXV), and while chatting with a high-end wedding photographer, I had my mind blown.
Early in the conversation, he told me what the FIRST THING he does when he goes to photograph a wedding… and it stopped me in my tracks.
Bottom line: If you want to get more partnerships and referrals as a photographer, you HAVE to pop on this Joycast episode.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-223
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
Have you ever felt like you’re running into the same problems over and over in your photography business?
Maybe you have a lot of clients but you’re still struggling to be profitable…
Maybe you face anxiety every time you need to sell your photography or your client wants to chat on the phone about prices…
Maybe you’re considering changing your business model… again…
Allyson faced those same issues as a long-time photographer.
But finally, after years of struggle, she found herself staring at a $14k paid invoice for her photography!
In today’s Joycast, she takes us deep into how she made this big shift, including:
- What finally changed for her and how she decided to invest in herself.
- Pushing past anxiety and showing up for her first in-home appointment with a client.
- What her husband said after she showed him the paid $14k invoice.
- How her first two sales compared to her expectations.
If you feel like you’re running into the same problems over and over in your business, or are struggling to transition from the hybrid (or digital file) model to the boutique model, this episode is for you!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-222
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you’ve ever felt guilty for spending time on your business (away from your family)… and then also felt guilty for spending time with your family (away from your business), this is the episode for you.
Today I’m diving into my motto “family first” and exploring what it really means to prioritize your family–and my take might just surprise you.
We’ll tackle things like:
- Building a foundation for your business that supports you and your family.
- How to decide when to invest in your business and when to invest in your family.
- My stance on weekend and night photography sessions.
- The advice I gave my student when she wanted to reschedule sessions to go on a last-minute family trip.
- How I navigated my kid’s school-aged years as a business owner.
So if you want to learn how to put family first, business first, AND you first (yes, it’s possible) hit play and get ready to get ready to take notes!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-221
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
#201 - How a Florida Educator Transformed Her Photography from Dabbling to $3,200 Orders:
Turning Her Back Burner Hobby into Real Money
If you struggle to charge what your photography is worth, or if thinking about selling your photography gives you the heebie-jeebies, then it’s time to examine your relationship with money.
The second I started pricing my photography, I fell into the number one “danger zone” pitfall possible… and that kept happening until I figured out a few key things.
Today, I’m going to share the money perspective shifts you need to keep in mind so you can avoid my mistakes and start REALLY charging what you’re worth.
If you want to understand what happens in our minds when we’re pricing our products and communicating those prices to clients, hit play, and let’s dig in!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-220
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If in-person sales or talking on the phone with a potential client freaks you out, you aren’t alone. A lot of photographers I work with are nervous about the boutique sales process–including pet photographer Claire Shelley.
Right before she moved to a new city, she was swamped with editing and disconnected from her clients. She rarely even knew if they liked their photos after she sent them over!
Claire knew there had to be a way to make more money and impact as a photographer. So she took a move to a new city as a way to revamp her business… even though the in-person sales aspect scared her!
Tune in to hear how she:
- Booked her first “Julie” in a new city–without ever telling her what she did!
- Decided to stay focused on animal photography rather than branching out to families.
- Dealt with the nerves she had around in-person sales and talking on the phone to potential clients.
- Talked to her partner about making the jump into Boutique Breakthrough.
- And more!
If you want to learn how Claire went from making $700 in 6 months to an almost $4,000 sale, hit play and get ready to feel inspired!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-219
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you’ve ever wondered how to stand out in a sea of competition, scroll no further, this is the episode for you!
Today I’m diving deep into five things you can do as a creative to be head and shoulders above everyone else in your area.
Spoiler alert: If you’re missing any of these five elements, you’re also missing out on a client relationship that could be even stronger (and risking your entire business).
Tune in today to learn:
- How to stand head and shoulders above your “competition”
- How I respond to missing deadlines in my business
- How I let a client know if there is an issue with their order
- How I have my team navigate any problems that arise with a client
- And more!
So if you want to stand out and serve your clients at the highest level, hit play and take a page right out of my business handbook.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-218
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt frustrated or alone after talking to your friends and family about your photography business?
If you’re the only entrepreneur in your circle, you might find it tricky to know what to share and what to keep private. And you may even find yourself questioning the nitty-gritty of your offers or business model.
As an entrepreneur and coach of hundreds of thousands of photographers, I have realized there are just some things that we should keep from loved ones and only share with other dreamers and do-ers.
So today I sat down to chat about:
- How to deal with the “peanut gallery” in your life.
- What to share about your business and what not to share.
- Seeing the world from a different perspective.
- Reframing struggle in our photography businesses.
- The “front pocket, back pocket” method I teach my students.
If you’re ready to feel less alone as a high-performer, settle in and hit play!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-217
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Photographers in large cities often say that the clients in their area won’t purchase anything but digital files.
So I sat down with L.A. photographer Catherine Della Ripa to talk about her experience and what it’s really like transitioning from the digital file model to the boutique business model in a competitive market.
She joins me today to cover things like:
- How to stand out in a crowded market when you’re not offering the same thing as everyone else.
- How she transitioned an existing client from a hybrid model to the boutique system (and how much photography they recently purchased from her).
- What her husband said after her first boutique photography sale.
- How she recognized gaps in her sales system and what she did to streamline her process (so it was more profitable).
- What she’s most excited about moving forward in her business.
If you can relate to feeling like no one in your market would pay for photography products rather than digital files, we recorded this Joycast just for you!
Hit play to get a dose of inspiration and tactical tools you need to go all-in on the boutique business model.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-216
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Almost all photographers will believe a common myth (or several common myths) at some point in their journey.
Not only do those myths cost valuable time and money, but they also lead to frustration and feeling like you’re spinning your wheels like Fred Flinstone.
If you’ve ever thought things like:
- “I need to have the latest and greatest gear to get started.”
- “I need a studio to be successful.”
- “My portfolio isn’t big enough to get clients.”
- “I should photograph anyone and everyone who wants my services.”
Then today’s episode is just for you.
Hit play to get unstuck, learn from my mistakes, and find the fastest path to success as a boutique portrait photographer.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-215
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever gotten a lead for your photography business, invested time and energy into explaining what you do and how you do it, only to be met with a disappointing response… or no response at all?
What if you could all but avoid that painful experience by separating your leads into five clear zones?
Today I’m talking to Allie Cline, who developed a five zone method for identifying right-fit clients in your photography business!
In our conversation today, we’ll cover:
- How a TikTok trend started Allie’s five zone method.
- How to avoid the “danger zone” of leads who will never turn into clients.
- Why taking on not “perfect” clients may still be the right thing for your business.
- One of the most common traps photographers fall into when looking for clients.
Allie originally shared this method at my three-day event just for boutique photographers, so if you missed out, here's your second chance to hear it!
And make sure to grab her five zone method graphic below, so you can follow along every time you get a new lead.
FIVE ZONE METHOD GRAPHIC:
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-214
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt STUCK in your photography business?
Maybe you have a portfolio, have purchased courses, and even have a few clients under your belt… but you still aren’t gaining much traction.
It feels like every time you DO take a few steps forward, you’re met with resistance and end up sliding back down to where you were.
Tacoma, Washington photographer Danica Williams was in the same boat.
But with ONE decision, she turned it all around and made more money in three months than in the last three years of her photography business… COMBINED.
Today we tackle things like:
- Going from charging ZERO to charging what you’re worth.
- Why building a beautiful portfolio often ISN’T the answer to getting more clients.
- Winning the mental game of seeing yourself as an ARTIST.
- Her first nearly $3,000 photography sale.
- Working a full-time job while growing your photography business and investing in education.
- And MORE!
So if you want to learn exactly how to get unstuck and start finally gaining traction in your photography business, hit play and get ready to feel empowered!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-213
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you are going to go ALL IN and invest time and money into your photography business, it’s important to have the buy-in of your spouse.
But how exactly do you get that?
It can be tricky – especially if you have tried before and failed, have purchased programs before and had them not work for you, or have a partner who doesn’t share your vision!
Today I’m sharing eight concrete steps for how to talk to your spouse about investing in your photography business.
These tips have not only worked for me, but for my students who have gone on to grow and run successful boutique portrait photography businesses! Sometimes even without the support of their spouse (at first).
Plus, I put together an invaluable cheat sheet of steps you can take to overcome concerns and stay calm during a difficult conversation.
So hit play if you’re ready to get the buy-in of your special person so you can run full speed ahead at your photography business dreams.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-212
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Are you wondering how to balance your photography business with your family plans and demands this summer?
The right summer mindset can not only set up your photography business for success (to the tune of making 30k+ only working a few days a month), but it can give you true time freedom to enjoy with your family!
So I rounded up six ways to make this summer season COUNT for your photography business!
I’m talking about things like:
- Reverse engineering your photography business goals
- The 3 phases you need to focus on to be sure you're not sidelining your business
- The right way to pre-plan for the holiday season
- How to stay accountable and take bite-sized actions toward your business goals
All WITHOUT working 40 hours a week.
So if you want to put your family first while growing your photography business this season, hit play and get ready to jot down these six things to do before Memorial Day!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-211
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt like throwing in the towel on your photography career?
Maybe you’re struggling with:
- Feeling like you’ve tried everything and still not finding right-fit clients
- Working all hours of the day and losing the time freedom you set out to create
- Being endlessly busy but unable to outsource or hire an employee
My guest today, Angela Hopper Lee, was in the same boat.
Her photography degree didn’t teach her how to get clients. So, while she had a few regular clients who would return year after year, she wasn’t growing her business.
Thankfully, that’s when she found us. Just a short while later, she owned her time again AND was averaging $3,000 an order!
So if you want to learn how to stand out in a sea of competition and sell your photography as a shy introvert, hit play and get ready to feel inspired!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-210
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever wondered if you’re ready to start CHARGING for your photography?
Maybe it feels too good to be true that you could make money doing something you love…
Or maybe you worry that you’re not good enough to start making money…
In this episode, I share eight ways to tell if you’re ready to start charging for your photography.
I also share how I got into photography, what my first sale was like, and what some of my “mind trash” told me along the way (maybe it will sound familiar to you).
When I was deciding to charge (and how much to charge) for my photography, my mind was filled with “what if?” questions like:
- What if I’m not good enough yet?
- What if she doesn’t like them?
- What if I charge too much?
But I turned that first $50 sale into a 26-year career as a professional photographer, selling over $3 million of photography services (without a photography degree).
So if you want to start charging for your photography but you’re not sure where to start, hit play and get ready to feel confident about your decision!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-209
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt like you needed to conform to what everyone else is doing in business?
Maybe you’ve seen digital files grow in popularity and considered switching or moving to a hybrid model.
When long-time photographer Jenn Kerfeld felt pressure to start offering digital files in her print photography business, it led to some unintended consequences… resulting in her wanting to stop photography altogether.
In this episode, she shares how she took action to find JOY in her business again, focused on quality over quantity, and went all-in on the boutique business model.
She also gives us the full story of how she was able to serve 20 high school senior clients FULLY last year, rather than churn through 75 as she had in previous years).
If you’ve ever felt like you need to do what everyone else is doing in business, sit back, hit play, and get ready to be inspired to stick to your own path!
Hit play here.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-208
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever been faced with a decision that you knew would change everything for you no matter which side of the fence you landed on?
When Liza Blecher’s husband got stationed in North LA, she and her five kids had to make the tough call to stay in Florida while he went ahead to California.
In this episode, she shares how she overcame new family dynamics, renovating a home, major back surgery, and fear of failure while starting her photography business.
She also gives us the full story of how she landed her first paying client… who went on to order $17,000 worth of photography products (and still keeps in touch with her today)!
If you’ve ever felt like your family life or busy schedule is standing in the way of your photography business goals, grab a cup of your favorite beverage, hit play, and get ready to be inspired by Liza’s story.
Hit play here.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-207
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Did you know about the tax benefits you have access to if you have a business?
It’s true, friend. Money (and lack thereof) is top of mind for the large majority of us - more than family, or even work. If the thought of taxes is holding you back from starting your photography business,
I’ve got you covered.
In this episode, I’m going to share the amazing tax benefits you have as a business owner. If anything, this will make you want to start your business sooner. Everything from trips, equipment, furniture, and so much more is applicable to tax concessions.
So grab a cup of your favorite beverage and pop open a Google doc -- because you’re definitely going to want to take notes for this one.
Hit play here
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-206
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Where are all my photographers who are stuck in the corporate grind and dream of spending their days behind the camera?
I have just the advice for you. This episode digs into the life of Anna-Marie who had a thriving career in corporate sales. But when it came to starting her own photography business, she had to unlearn everything she learned as a star employee.
Fast forward today, Anna-Marie has a 6-figure business doing what she loves.
If you worry that you may lack the confidence, people skills, and a huge network to build a successful business…
Pop in your earbuds to learn how Anna-Marie got her first client, persevered in spite of a physical injury and how she creates a deep connection with all her clients.
Hit play here.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-205
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Are you a newbie photographer? You'll want to hear today's podcast. Meet Ryan - he left his teaching career to pursue photography when his gut kept telling him, “You’ve GOT to get out of that job.”
Before going Boutique, his average sale was only $345! His first Boutique order was $3006!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-204
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever attended a photography conference? What did you think? Did you get everything you needed for your business?
Picture this: an event that goes beyond the ordinary, where education meets empowerment, and where transformation is not just a possibility but a promise. That’s Go Boutique Live.
I just finished the 2024 live event and can’t wait to share my biggest takeaways with you. So pop in those earbuds and maybe grab a notepad for this podcast. It’s full of golden nuggets!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://photographybusinessinstitute.com/podcast/episode-203
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Is a six-figure income in your photography business possible! Yes AND today, you'll meet four of my students that crushed their goals in 2023.
Meet Jean Lachat, a seasoned photographer from Chicago, whose journey spans over two decades. In the dynamic Peak Performers program for six years, Jean reveals how cultivating confidence and refining her mindset played a pivotal role in elevating her sales and business growth.
Next up is Kristin Gowan, the proud owner of Kristin Gowan Photography in Ontario, Canada. She'll share how she went from an average of $25K to $35K in previous years to over 100K in 2023
Kelli Gowdy, the skilled photographer from High Point, North Carolina, with 12.5 years of experience, takes us on her journey of specializing in high school seniors. Hear about the mindset shift that propelled Kelli to surpass her financial goals by $30,000 and the importance of standing firm on pricing.
Lastly, Katie Redmond, the passionate owner of K. Redmond Photography in Michigan, unfolds her 13-year journey. With a focus on empowering women through photography, Katie emphasizes the significance of consistency and keeping things fresh in her business. Discover how stepping outside her comfort zone and building relationships in the community led to exponential growth.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-202
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever feel like life just keeps getting in the way of your dreams?
For Sally Brown, it seemed like one thing after another way standing in the way of her doing what she loved - photography.
But a healthy dose of frustration (and a fateful trip to Italy) helped her finally get on the path she was meant for.
(And bring home enough income to make her husband’s eyes pop out of his head!)
Need a reminder that FATE takes ACTION (and you can do it ALL)?
Pop in your earbuds and hit play on this episode of the Worth Every Penny Podcast now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-201
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Knowing yourself is key to …. well, everything!
Whether it’s living a good life, building a great relationship, or running a business…
Knowing your natural strengths is KEY!
One of the best ways I’ve ever seen to discover your hidden strengths and talents is an assessment I give to every potential hire.
I won’t even look at a resume until I see their results!
(And compare them with my own)
Pop in your earbuds, and I’ll tell you all about it!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-200
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
When you get paid to do something you’re naturally good at, life is just BETTER.
It feels easier. More rewarding. More exciting!
On the other hand, working 8 hours a day (or MORE) at something that feels like trying to put on jeans right after you put lotion on your legs is just …. Exhausting.
If that’s been you, and you’re looking for a life that FITS you instead of OWNS you, I’ve got something to share with you today.
The key to building a life you love starts with finding out your hidden talents.
You know, those things you’re naturally good at, like you were born to do.
Today, I’m going to show you one of my favorite ways to expose those “hidden talents.”
So pop in your earbuds and hit play, because today is all about learning the ins and outs of YOU!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-199
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Feel like you have to say “yes” to every offer of work right now?
I know how that feels - your schedule is full of cobwebs, and people are TRYING to give you money, so turning it down feels wrong.
Spoiler alert: Saying “no” can be a really good thing.
Learning when to say no to work you can’t/won’t/don’t-want-to-do is one of the skills that will take your business all the way up.
Before you say “yes” to one more thing, listen to today’s podcast.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-198
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Does work-life balance for your family mean you have to consider both your job as well as your spouse's?
If you’re struggling with supportive-spouse-burnout, you’ve got to hear today’s podcast.
You’ll hear how Christian Gipson10X’d her average order while working a fraction of the hours, she jumped at the chance.
Hit play now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-197
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If there’s one thing I’ve learned from watching The Great British Baking Show….
It’s that bread sculptures and towering cakes need structure or else they tumble to disaster!
Your photography year is the same way.
That’s why I have my students do an activity every January that sets them up with a strong foundation for the next 12 months.
I call it “Planuary,” and it would get you a handshake from Paul Hollywood if he was judging business instead of cake. Pop in your earbuds and listen now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-196
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
When I had the opportunity to sit down with one of the biggest minds in business, who’s also one of my FAVORITE authors, I didn’t hold back!
Dr. Benjamin Hardy, the world-renowned business thought leader, was at the same entrepreneur retreat I was at! Seeing a golden opportunity, I invited him over and picked his brain …
All for your benefit!
In today’s podcast, I’m sharing my biggest takeaways from our convo…. like the easy way you can 10x your business this year by doing LESS!
You’re gonna be blown away by what he had to say - and how easy it will be to put his ideas to work in your business.
Grab a notebook and press play now! What Dr. Hardy had to say could change your business forever (in a GREAT way)!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-195
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Think your town is TOO SMALL for you to get BIG ORDERS with boutique photography?
It’s not! And I’ll prove it….
Mom-of-two Carmen was living in a teeny tiny forest town in New Hampshire with just 2,000 residents when she started her photography business.
So how did she go from a $150 average to $2,000 orders without moving to the big city?
Press play to find out!
(P.S. - You can do EXACTLY what she did, no matter where you live!)
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-194
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Inflation is out of control! With the cost of everything going up, you might be worried that your boutique photography clients could wander off into the wilderness, taking their business with them.
I’m here to tell you - they won’t.
In fact, this December, my students made more than $650,000 IN ONE MONTH!!!
Boutique Photography is one of those things people will spend money on even when times are tough, the economy is shaky, you get the picture….
In today’s podcast, I’ll show you how my students sold over half a million dollars in four little weeks. Press play now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-193
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Today, I drop some major news that's set to revolutionize the world of photography.
If you're a passionate creative, deeply in love with your camera, and dreaming of a career or side hustle that's as fulfilling as it gets, then today's episode was made for you!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-192
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Especially for moms, life is full of tough choices.
When Felicia’s 2-month-old baby boy couldn’t stay out of the hospital, she knew she had to make a choice:
Being a present mom OR being an “I work crazy long hours” digital photographer.
UNLESS ….
She could find a third option that allowed her to do BOTH!!
(Spoiler Alert: She did - and got a $3,297 sale!!)
If you’ve been struggling to make a decision about your photography career, you’re going to love the happy-ending-story for Felicia and her family.
Press play now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-191
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if I told you one itty bitty word could change the fate of your business in 2024?
It can.
There’s an exercise I do every year around New Year’s, and it WORKS to set the pace, outlook, and intention for my business for the next 12 months.
It only takes a couple of minutes, and it’s CREATIVE and FUN!
Ready to take charge of your next year – in the easiest and most effective way I’ve ever seen?
Press play now, and I’ll show you how!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-190
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Did you know December is the most important month for a portrait photographer? No joke - from tax deductions to LOTS of people spending money, this is the peak season for photographers. So it’s wild to me some portrait photographers pause their business until the New Year.
I get that there is a LOT going on in December, but there are ways you can do BOTH, and WELL!
If you’re considering putting your business on pause until January, pop in your earbuds and let me show you a few things that don’t take much effort from you this month but really can make a big difference for your business.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-189
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
I like money.
I bet you do, too.
But money ISN’T why we do what we do as photographers!
For me and my student Jenn (and probably you, too) being a photography business owner is about having plenty of time for our families while still contributing to the family budget!
So when Jenn stopped selling digital files and found herself making $13,000 in a single month ….
She KNEW her new business model was perfect for her and her family!!
See how she made the switch in today’s podcast!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-188
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Today, I’m interviewing my very first boutique client, Julie - YES, THE JULIE!!! who invested over $1,800 on artwork of her daughter 21 years ago!
You’ve probably heard me talk about my Julie if you’ve been around my community for a bit. Before Julie, my largest order had been teeny tiny. But once Julie became my client, everything changed for me.
I finally saw what was possible for my photography business. It was at that point that I knew that if one client loved what I was doing enough to invest over $1,000, there were more like her out there. And that’s why I celebrate so hard for my students when they get their first “Julie!”
In this interview, you’ll hear what Julie was thinking when she made the investment as a newlywed and new mom on a budget. And if you keep hearing from people that you’re too expensive, you’ll get a glimpse inside the thoughts and feelings of a right-fit client so you can see how this model works when your marketing attracts them.
Curious, right? Pop in your earbuds and press play now.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-187
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Do you ever find yourself saying, “I have no idea how to make this happen?” Yep - that was Meagan.
If you need a re-encouraging story that will remind you why you should never give up, you’re going to want to listen to Meagan’s story.
Grab a cup of tea, and let’s fill your inspiration tank.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-186
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Do you ever think , “I’m too new a photographer to charge more” or “there’s no way people will pay more for my photography?”
Tabitha Henderson was letting these EXACT thoughts keep her stuck in a photography business that was going NOWHERE.
If this is you, make sure you listen now for a big ole cup of inspiration.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-185
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
Click Here
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Are you a business owner and an introvert? Do you wish someone could just map out the exact formula for a conversation?
Talking to strangers can feel overwhelming. That’s because you don’t know where to start these conversations.
Today, I share exactly how. Hit play now, and I’ll give you the formula to structure your conversations with strangers into conversations about your photography business.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-184
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/472gdev
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Are you the type to drive yourself crazy obsessing over EVERY LITTLE DETAIL of your photography sessions?
It can make you feel crazypants… I get it! You want everything to be awesome, right?
I can be super obsessive over my photography sessions, too, because I want to give my clients a white-glove experience they’ll love.
Then I’ve figured out - there are only 4 things that are REALLY worth obsessing over!
Hit play now, and I’ll tell you what to obsess over so you can let the stress go about everything else.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-183
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3QnDiRJ
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
The Fosses felt like they couldn’t squeeze another drop of money out of the time they had to put into their photography business.
This husband-and-wife wedding photography team was maxxed out. With two babies at home they COULD NOT squeeze another minute out of their busy schedules
(and didn’t want to take another moment from their growing babies)
But when they realized they weren’t making enough money no matter how much they worked, something had to change.
When they found THIS one marketing idea ….
They made $10,000 in just TWO MONTHS!!
Hit play to hear their story.
Are you struggling with a HUGE photography business decision? Like whether to get a studio, new gear or if you can afford to hire an employee?
Deciding the right move is scary. I got you! The answer lies within your numbers.
It's time to embrace them because, just like a handful of “draw 4” cards in UNO, they hold the key to a win.
Today, we'll delve into the three numbers I look at daily to steer my photography business to growth and profits.
And guess what? I'm even sharing a copy of the exact spreadsheet I use so you can effortlessly track your income and expenses. It’s going to be a game-changer.
Pop in your earbuds and press play now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-181
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3Q21ZTC
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Are you considering closing your photography business? If you’re tired of doing everything you can to find clients, only to realize that the hours you’re spending aren’t worth what you’re getting paid, this episode is for you.
Before you close down your photography business and start applying for jobs, you need to hear Andy and Danielle’s story!
This husband-and-wife photographer team with 5 kids live in a town of just 1,000 people. They started taking on side jobs when their photography business of 6 years started to slide.
The decided to do something drastic and only 53 days later…
They got a $12,620 client order!!!! Hit play now to listen to their story!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-180
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/48NPyU0
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Most of the common advice you’ll hear about starting a photography business is BS!
Yet just like when I was pregnant with my twins, everyone and their mother wanted to give me some kind of advice.
Did I want that advice? No.
Was it good advice? Mostly no.
Did it irritate me like poison ivy on my eyeballs? YES!
Well-meaning people who love you, but don’t know diddly squat about running a photography business will fill your ears with “advice” that’s anything but helpful.
And listening to it, I’m sad to say, can actually hold you BACK!
On today’s podcast, I’m going over the most common pieces of advice about starting a photography business that are BS.
Like:
- How long it takes to turn a profit
- Whether you need a studio or not
- What attracts high-paying clients
- And a lot more!
So pop in your earbuds and get ready for some straight-up FACTS that cancel out the BS you’ve probably been hearing!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-179
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3EZ4f8O
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Scared to leave your current career because you’re afraid you won’t make enough money as a photographer?
It’s a valid point - the average photographer only makes $30K a year. Yikes!
That’s exactly what my student Krystina, a hair and make up artist, feared when she started investigating the idea of leaving her career to become a photographer.
She wondered, “How do you do set up a photography business so that you don’t make ‘average’ photographer money?:
Within two months of boutique photography education, Krystina got her first $1,500 order! And she hasn’t looked back since.
If you’re scared to make a change and worried that photography might not be as worthwhile as your job now, you’ve got to hear Krystina’s story.
Pop in your earbuds now and hit play - the motivation you need is right here!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-178
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3RwV4UD
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Ever wonder if you should you build relationships with other photographers? Is it worth your time? Will it amp up your head trash and send your self-esteem on a downward spiral? Or worse yet, could it hurt your business in the long run?
My take on these relationships is a bit untraditional. So if you’re stuck in camp naysayer and feel like having photographer friends isn’t for you, hear me out.
On this episode I’ll show you how these relationships can actually become your secret sauce to building a thriving, creatively fulfilling photography business. And you’ll learn three key things to look for when building relationships with other photographers so you, your clients, your family and your new photographer friends all benefit. So hit play and let’s dig in!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-177
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3LuKtWF
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Struggling to “get it all done?” The breakneck pace of running a photography business while caring for your family can feel impossible.
Believe me, I know. I started my business with newborn twins at home and added baby number three a year later.
I had to figure out a schedule that allowed time for my kids, my business, my husband, and, you know … ME!
On today’s episode, I’m going to show you the exact weekly schedule I used to keep my busy photography business thriving while still having plenty of time for three kids.
I know this worked for me - and it can work for you, too. So press play now!
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-176
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/45NASlJ
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Do you really need a photography studio?
Today, we talk about why you should NOT get a studio until you have done ONE very important thing.
You’ll meet one of my students who took on the expense of a studio and what happened next.
It's a tale of a really poor upbrining, with a dash of risk, and the kind of mistake that could've had her throwing in the towel.
Curious to hear all the juicy details about Shelby's studio rollercoaster?
Hit play to tune in.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-175
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/47Yt0PX
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
There’s a dirty little trick your brain is playing that is holding you back.
The crazy thing is that you don’t even realize that it’s happening!
But I’ve seen it sabotage so many of my students that it’s time I shed some light on it.
In today’s Joycast, I’ll share how the “What if…” game your mind plays can sabotage your forward momentum and some powerful tips I use to push past them.
I’ll also share 9 powerful words that you can use when a client stumps you with a hard question.
Don’t get paralysis by analysis here - press play on today’s episode and learn these tips to overcome self doubt.
RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-174
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3sEcHHC
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Should you hire an intern? What are the benefits of having young people in your company?
Better yet, where do you find those “impressive youth,” and how do you convince them to work for you?!
Today, I’ll share the four BIG benefits of mentoring that I bet you’ve never thought of before (I certainly hadn’t until I did it myself). These are HUGE bonuses for you and your photography business that you don’t want to miss!
Press play now to find out how mentoring will help you build a better photography business and it will feel as good as snuggling a new baby (it’s the BEST)!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-173
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/47ARKh3
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how-to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Do you ever feel like what’s the point? Between the grind of figuring out your photography business and taking care of all the things your kids need from you, it would be easier to put a swimsuit on a gorilla.
Today, I met Janelle Krulicki, a stay-at-home mom who was spending an whopping 15 hours PER digital file client. Exhausted and burned out with barely any income to show for it and a husband who was getting annoyed, Janelle was at a crossroads of whether or not a photography business could work for her.
Here’s her story of what she changed everything, got a $5,000 order and THRILLED her husband at the extra money coming into their household every month!!!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-172
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3OVZsuA
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how-to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Have you ever wanted to be a fly on the wall during someone else's photography session? You know - see what they do differently.
Recently I had students in a real-life LIVE session and selling presentation, I gotta say, it made me a little nervous!
AND things did NOT go as planned!
But it was their takeaways from the day that were the REAL surprise!
It’s so cool to see what these professional portrait photographers - new and experienced - picked up on as I was “doing my thing.”
You’ve GOT to hear these. So press play now!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-171
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3qlM0XI
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how-to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Who says summer camp is just for kids?
So last week, my Peak Performance students and my team got together for a two-day selling and social media summer camp in Nashville, Tennessee. It was awesome!
And I finally did something that my students have been asking me to do for years…
In front of 73 students, I did a live in-person session from photo session all the way to sales presentation.
And it totally didn’t go as I expected! 😯
Hit play now and find out what happened.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-170
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3YnEecj
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Feel like you’re not a “real” photographer because you don’t have a photography degree?
That’s exactly what kept my student Brandy Aldrich from embracing her long-term dream of being a photographer!
“They told us in college that we needed a degree to back up our talent, so I thought if I went out on my own, I’d fail.”
The thing is - Brandy already had a good eye. She took great pictures. She didn’t need a degree in photography. What she needed to learn was something totally different.
Listen now to find out what changed everything for Brandy and helped her transition from giving her photos away to getting $4,000 orders.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-169
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3Y1Ev4x
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
“Nobody will ever pay that much for photography.”
“You’re not even a real photographer.”
“You’ll never be able to run a photography business and raise kids, too.”
Cutting, judgmental comments from your friends, spouse or even STRANGERS can really get you down. Especially when they are about your photography business.
If you don't find a way to rise above them, they can absolutely drag you and your photography business down.
Hit play to learn how to take those comments, throw them into a pile, and set them on fire - because you are meant for MORE than what people say!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-168
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3O2nQtc
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
There’s nothing more terrifying than when someone asks you for a discount on your photography.
Do you freeze?
Stumble over your words, unsure what to say?
Cave in and give them the discount on your photography?
PHOTOGRAPHERS, WE DON’T HAVE TO DO THIS!
The key is to be prepared when photography clients ask this question. I recently asked a local artist for a discount and his response was the best I’ve ever heard. Hit play to learn what he said (and you can too) when someone asks you for a discount on y our photography services.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-167
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3rgGbe9
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Do you ever feel like every photographer in your market is out there doing great work and raking in clients… except for you?
Despite having a photography degree from one of the best photography schools in the country, Kim struggled to make a full-time living doing what she loves.
As impostor syndrome took root, she wondered if she would ever make more than $200 per session…
Hit play to learn how she beat her head trash, got confident in her photography business, and made a $4,400 sale!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-166
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3NG87zA
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Your kids are out of school, but does that mean your photography business has to be on vacation, too?
NO!
Here are 6 ways to attract awesome photography clients this summer while getting TONS of family time, too!
Hit play now and I’ll show you how to get the MOST out of summer (for your family and your business).
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-165
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3pf6UHy
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
They say it takes 10 years to be an overnight success, but Allie Cline proved “them” wrong!
This self-proclaimed introvert and mom of 3 had just moved to a new town when she decided to join Boutique Breakthrough.
So what did she do to get $12K in orders in her FIRST 30 DAYS in business???
(Something you can do TODAY!)
Find out how Allie made something BIG happen for her business, all while taking care of three kids and working full time, in today’s podcast!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-164
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3JlmQP4
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Do you ever feel like despite trying EVERYTHING, your lack of clients means that you’re bad at marketing your photography business?
My student Leah had the same fear. After years of several misses, her photography business had turned into something unfilling and draining.
But then she tried one more thing…
Hit play to learn how long-time photographer Leah finally turned everything around and landed a $6,000 order!!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-163
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3X3JilF
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
When the kids get out of school for summer break, it can really throw a wrench in your schedule as a photographer.
How are you supposed to run your business, squeeze in sessions, all while caring for your little ones who are suddenly home 24/7?
I’ve got three kids, and my family navigated the summer schedule for 15 years so my business didn't have to come to a screeching halt. It can be done!
On this episode, I’m sharing the 6 rules of managing summer vacation when you’ve got kids and a photography business. Summer schedule stress disappears when you have a plan!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-162
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3WTGib6
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Want to go ALL IN on your photography business, but feeling pressed for time between your current career and your family?
Friend, I TOTALLY get it. And I have some good news for you…
I rounded up a few simple rules that will help you maximize the time you do have so you can transition into a thriving photography career! (Without burning the candle at both ends or sacrificing even more time with your family.)
Curious? Hit play and let’s dive in!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-161
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/429fNQd
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Want to give up your career to run a photography business? Working mom of 3 Shaina felt the same way…
She wanted to do photography, but with a full-time job, three kids, two dogs, and a husband all needing her attention, she didn't know where to start.
Hear how Shaina took the first step and leveraged the small amount of time she did have to go all in and get a $3,000 client order!!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-160
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3C8l0xf
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Have you ever felt guilty about asking people to pay {gasp…that much} for your photography? Do you have trouble charging what you’re worth because of how you grew up?
Maybe you’re even worried that you’ll feel guilty or change in icky ways if you start making more money in your photography business.
Today I’m sharing nine ways to use money from your photography business for GOOD so you can shift your perspective around what it means to be profitable and help you and the people around you live your best lives.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-159
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/42ZLTig
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Have you ever found it hard to believe that people will invest big bucks in your photography?
Maybe you’ve fallen into the trap of selling from your own wallet (thinking about what you would pay for something).
And because of that, you’ve kept your prices low.
Today I’m sharing what I learned about competing on price while staying in an all-inclusive resort in Mexico for a business event!!
Hit play to hear my epiphany and what it means for your photography business!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-158
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/42fvshz
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Have you ever had friends and family doubt that you could make a living from your photography?
Or maybe you’ve felt pressured to quit photography altogether and get a “real” job?
Kristen was in the same boat. She didn’t have a support system for her photography dreams, but she still KNEW she had to keep going.
Today she’s sharing how she went from a digital file photographer to a boutique photographer and ended up making $30k in just 3 months!!
Hit play to hear the full story of how she did it!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-157
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
There are so many people struggling in the world right now. Here’s how you can help just by using your camera.
Everywhere I look, there are people who can use a helping hand. But I don’t have unlimited funds to write checks or the hours I’d love to dedicate to volunteering. Here’s what I can do, and so can you!
We can use our cameras in specific ways that give back while we grow our photography businesses, too. I’m not just talking about giving away free sessions.
This one idea is on the top of my FAVORITES list for lifting as I climb (my life’s motto)!
Hit play to learn the five steps to “Giving and Getting” so you can feel good, do good, and grow your photography business in the process!!!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-156
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3URyV3d
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Do you want to transition out of wedding photography and into portrait sessions?
Maybe you still love weddings! But you know that they’re so time-consuming…
One of my students came to the same conclusion.
And after her revelation, she made more in a 40 minute session than she was making in 40 HOURS of wedding photography work!!
Hit play to learn how Kaycee made the jump and how you can do the same thing!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-155
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3oaLl9V
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Did you know that there is ONE expense that could cost your photography business more than ANYTHING else?
No, it’s not taxes or gear…
In fact, it’s something you might not even know exists!
Hit play to learn the cost that NO ONE talks about in a photography business (and how you can avoid it).
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-154
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera! joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3KLRQrF
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
I’m a creative entrepreneur who struggles with shiny object syndrome. So there are days when I feel like I’ve gotten NOTHING on my list done.
Today I’m sharing one decision you can make to MAXIMIZE the time you do have to work on your business – so you can fit in more of the things you NEED to do to build a business that thrive while you put #familyfirst.
Hit play to learn the number one thing you have to stop doing right now.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-153
CAMERA GIVEAWAY: Review this Joycast and enter to win a BRAND NEW camera!
joyofmarketing.com/cameragiveaway
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3ZFfb3i
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Do you dream about what you would do with extra income from a photography business?
Shalicia did, too – but she quickly realized that working full time AND being a photographer is hard work (say goodbye to resting on the weekends)...
After three years of exhaustion, she learned that there is ANOTHER way of doing business. One that allowed her to replace her full-time income and finally experience the life she wanted!
Hit play for a life update (big changes are coming for Shalicia on May 1) and healthy dose of inspiration from our Peak Performer of the year, Shalicia Johnson!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-152
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3FVjqRk
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you could get 3 WHOLE DAYS of photography business training boiled down into just ONE bite-sized podcast?
Your wish is my command!
After an AMAZING Go Boutique Live (the buzz has been that it was our best one yet), I decided to round up my 5 biggest takeaways for YOU.
It’s a great refresher if you were there, and a great way to catch up if you weren’t.
Make sure you grab a pen before you hit play – you’re going to want to take notes so you can use these takeaways to supercharge your business in 2023!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-151
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3LE6PWt
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever struggled to believe that you’re worth the prices you need to charge to run a profitable boutique photography business?
Amy Yang struggled with the same thing when she started turning her love for photography into a high-end photography business.
Hit play to learn how this military wife went from selling underpriced digital files to earning 6 figures in her photography business AND being voted by members of our Peak Performance Coaching community as Sherpa / Coach of the year!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-150
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3FbCCdg
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Are you a wedding photographer who wants to transition to portrait photography so you can spend time with your family on the weekends? Or maybe you’ve already started to make a change in your business and are stuck in a weird, awkward hybrid phase.
Amy Wellenkamp was in the same boat. She wanted to make a change, so she offered a little bit of this, and a little bit of that.
But when the pandemic hit and she lost 30% of her business in five days, she knew she had to go all in on ONE thing.
Hit play to learn how this single mom photographer pivoted from weddings to portraits (during an incredibly stressful time) and CRUSHED it!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-149
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3IRuTSR
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
As promised, here is PART TWO of the top secrets to reaching 100k from my 2022 Yay Award Winners!
These photographers earned as much as $400,000 last year in their photography businesses, so you'll want to hear their favorite tips for growing a profitable photography business.
Hit play to learn what changed the game for these 7 boutique portrait photographers and how they’re crushing it right now!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-148
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3SxCA55
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you had the chance to hear how other boutique portrait photographers are finding success no matter where they live or what circumstance they’re in?
Well, today you CAN!! I gathered up some of my TOP performing students (all who did 6-figures+ in 2022) and asked them to share their biggest secrets with you.
Some of them are photography veterans, and some are just starting out. Some are in small towns, and others are in huge cities.
What they have in common is that they have a passion for photography (just like you) and have cracked the code on being able to run their business AND be there for their families.
Hit play to learn what changed the game for these 7 boutique portrait photographers – and stay tuned for next week’s episode when you’ll hear from 7 MORE top performers!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-147
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/41a2srr
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
How do you juggle the dreams you have for your photography business and the desire to travel more with your family?
Today I’m chatting with my student (and long-time photographer) Chianne Coffman to learn how she was able to take her business from struggling to 6-figures WHILE taking frequent road trips with her husband and two kids.
Hit play to hear the steps she took to show up for her family WITHOUT giving up on her business goals.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-146
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/40MAYI6
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever gotten a hurtful comment on social media about your photography business (or maybe even about you personally)?
Has the fear of being judged by commenters has stopped you from putting yourself out there?
Today I’m sharing a mean comment I received on Instagram and how I responded to it.
Hit play to learn how to keep a professional image AND prevent yourself from taking on any head trash from the internet trolls.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-145
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3RyOBqi
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Your photography business name is one of the first things potential customers see (and what they will remember you by) — so it’s CRITICAL that you pick the right one.
But brainstorming the perfect name can be tough. Where do you even start?
Never fear! Hit play to learn my tips for creating a name for your photography business that you won’t want to change in a few years.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-144
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3WCbs5n
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you could take control of your photography career in just a few months?
WITHOUT spending endless hours on the computer editing or sacrificing family time…
That’s exactly what breast cancer survivor Stacy Lange did!
When her husband said things like, “You’re always on that dang computer, and you’re only making $200!”….Stacy realized she was giving more time to her clients than to her family.
Hit play to learn how she went from $200 sessions to $4,000 sessions while being the full-time caregiver for her son.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-143
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3WjsMMc
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Can you get away with simply ADDING prints to your digital file photography business to make it boutique?
Spoiler alert: This “hybrid” business model does far more harm than good (and leaves both you and your clients frustrated).
Hit play to hear the key differences between the two business models and learn the tweaks you need to make to become FULLY boutique!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-142
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3iPVuGJ
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What do Bill Gates, Warren Buffet, Elon Musk, Mark Zuckerberg, and Mark Cuban all have in common? They read. A LOT!
But they don’t just read anything… they read books that are relevant to them and what they’re going through.
So I rounded up 3 books that I read this year that I believe EVERY photographer could benefit from!! Hit play to hear my picks!
So I rounded up 3 books that I read this year that I believe EVERY photographer could benefit from!! Hit play to hear my picks!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-141
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://bit.ly/3XawgSb
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Do you ever feel like if you don’t start to make more profit in your photography business, you’ll have to go back to a J-O-B (and sacrifice time with your family)?
Is imposter syndrome holding you back from charging more in your photography business? Hit play to learn how Amanda Costle went from struggling with confidence and giving her photography away for free to getting a $3,400 order.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-140
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3WN01rX
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt like you tried everything, gave it your all, used every tool in your toolbox…
and were still disappointed with the result?
It can be especially disappointing to not get what we want out of our photography business. I’ve been there!!
But that doesn’t mean we have to drag that disappointment into the new year or stay in a downward spiral of guilt.
Hit play to learn how to start fresh after a disappointing year.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-139
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
bit.ly/3GhkoYU
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
You may be surprised, but education is one of my BIGGEST business expenses every year… and it’s WELL WORTH IT!
Want to take a peek behind the curtain and see EXACTLY what I invested in this year?
Hit play to get a peek inside my education diet in 2022!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-138
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
bit.ly/3Vbo0Qn
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers
February 28 - March 2, 2023
TICKETS ON SALE NOW!
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
The 12 Gifts of Christmas are going on now - with daily giveaways through December 23.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Feel like you need to put your dreams of running a photography business on hold until your kids get older, your situation changes, or you win the lottery?
This ONE SHIFT could make all the difference for you…
Hit play to learn how single mom Elizabeth Covey left her corporate career and grew her photography business WHILE staying at home with her son. (Yes! It’s possible!)
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES: www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-137
SHOW TRANSCRIPT: bit.ly/3Pr8ZJ4
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE - 3 Day Virtual Event for Boutique Photographers February 28 - March 2, 2023 TICKETS ON SALE NOW! www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE: Check out my latest how to videos: https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW? Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Want to know what clients are ACTUALLY buying this time of year?
Today I’m sharing 3 things that every photographer can sell to get some extra cash in their pocket RIGHT NOW.
Hit play for some easy ways to show up for your clients AND your family this time of year!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-136
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
bit.ly/3UBphjx
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Want to put things out into the world but they never feel totally DONE or quite PERFECT enough?
I hear you!! I recently realized that I was hurting myself (and my business) by overthinking and overworking ideas.
Thankfully, I found a solution. Hit play to learn the free tool I now use to overcome perfectionism and keep moving forward.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-135
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
bit.ly/3ioImYv
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Want to transition from being a wedding photographer to a portrait photographer but don’t know where to start?
Feeling like there’s no way you could increase your income without sacrificing your nights and weekends?
Hit play to learn how my student, Jessie, made the switch and went from making $250 a session to having a $6,000 week – while still spending plenty of time with her little girl!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-134
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
bit.ly/3VeRgWM
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Building a photography business can be overwhelming and confusing. With so much advice being thrown at you, where do you even start?
I had a HUGE aha recently, sitting in a room with one of my original marketing mentors, Dan Kennedy.
What he said made me realize that if you don’t get one crazy SIMPLE thing right, you’ll NEVER get out of overwhelm or confusion!
Hit play to learn how you might be unintentionally setting yourself up to fail (and how you can turn it around and create a system for SUCCESS!)
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-133
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
bit.ly/3X7qcuf
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Looking for some unique ways to spoil your best clients this holiday season (and all year round)?
Hit play to learn how I nurture my BEST clients and make them feel amazing so they keep coming back again and again!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-132
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3UhPK6n
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – LIVE 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Does “that’s it?” cross your mind every time you see what your photography business is bringing in?
Does it feel like nothing you’re trying is moving the needle, no matter how long you’ve been at it?
Hit play to learn how my student Jenn went from a yearly profit of $376 (despite being in business for 13 years) to $46k just ONE YEAR after becoming boutique.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-131
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3zxzWnq
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Do you love photography, but have no idea where to start when it comes to making it into a business?
Or maybe you’ve just started your photography business, and are already hitting some roadblocks…
Hit play to learn how my student Tara booked TWO amazing $1k+ clients just WEEKS after starting her photography business.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-130
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3CEnF1n
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
If you’ve ever looked at your photography business and thought, “All this work… and I only made THAT much??” I hear you.
Hit play to learn 13 EASY ways to add value to your photography so clients will HAPPILY pay you more!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-129
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3CEnF1n
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you could STOP hustling and earn even MORE in your photography business?
Today I’m going to share a little simple, eye-opening math formula that shows you JUST HOW CLOSE you actually are to making 6 figures.
Hit play to learn what I like to call “The Money Math Behind a 6-Figure Photography Business”.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-128
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3MnEFNQ
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt defeated in your photography business? Like nothing you’re trying is working?
Today my student Carolyn Slavenas is sharing how she moved to a new community AND transitioned THREE clients into boutique clients… FAST.
Hit play to learn how she quickly reinvented herself and generated a $4,147 order!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-127
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3M2E18n
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt a pang of guilt while pulling money out of your wallet to buy something?
Money can have such an emotional chokehold on us.
But we have the power to change that!
Hit play to learn the mindset shift you need to make to live the BIG life of your dreams. (I learned this from my amazing “second dad” and I can’t wait to share it with you…)
RESOURCES:
TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3E1sowr
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-126
FREE 5 DAY BOOKING BOOST
September 26-September 30, 2022
www.joyofmarketing.com/bookingboost
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
As photographers, we need to be present on social media to get in front of potential and existing clients. But sometimes creating content for your business can feel like a full-time job. Exhausting, right?
Thankfully, it doesn’t have to be that way!
Hit play to learn how to promote your photography business on social media without driving yourself crazy or getting sucked into a “scroll hole”.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-125
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3eRO8jG
FREE 5 DAY BOOKING BOOST
September 26-September 30, 2022
www.joyofmarketing.com/bookingboost
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Do you ever feel like NOTHING is working to move your photography business forward? It’s one of the most disheartening feelings in the world!!
The good news is, there are a few simple and strategic things you can do to start seeing more momentum in your business… TODAY!
Hit play to learn what to do when it feels like nothing is working.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-124
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
https://bit.ly/3eMApe3
FREE 5 DAY BOOKING BOOST
September 26-September 30
www.joyofmarketing.com/bookingboost
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
One of the best tricks I have up my sleeve for running a successful photography business is turning all of my amazing, right-fit clients into repeat clients.
It’s easier than you might think!
Hit play to learn how I keep my clients coming back to me time and time again (after they’ve gushed about their experience to their friends, of course)!
Wondering where to find your first few clients? Make sure you’re chatting while you’re out and about! DM me “conversation starters” on Instagram (@Sarah.Petty) and I’ll send you over some genuine ways to strike up a conversation wherever you are while working in what you do as a photographer.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-123
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://keap.li/HVzs20
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt like you can’t have a career in photography? Like it’s unrealistic, or just not something that someone in your position could do?
Today I’m chatting with Army veteran, new mama, and photographer Michelle DeLurme who felt the same way… until something shifted.
Hit play to learn what that was and how she went from working 80-hours a week to just a few hours a DAY while still generating enough income to take her daughter to Disney World (and all of the other fun extras she wants)!
Ready to start your own conversations that lead to an amazing community of people around you? DM me “conversation starters” on Instagram (@Sarah.Petty) and I’ll send you over some genuine ways to strike up a conversation wherever you are.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-122
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://keap.li/edjuOf
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Have you ever felt like you can’t have a career in photography? Like it’s unrealistic, or just not something that someone in your position could do?
Today I’m chatting with Army veteran, new mama, and photographer Michelle DeLurme who felt the same way… until something shifted.
Hit play to learn what that was and how she went from working 80-hours a week to just a few hours a DAY while still generating enough income to take her daughter to Disney World (and all of the other fun extras she wants)!
Ready to start your own conversations that lead to an amazing community of people around you? DM me “conversation starters” on Instagram (@Sarah.Petty) and I’ll send you over some genuine ways to strike up a conversation wherever you are.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-122
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://keap.li/edjuOf
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM me “Conversation Starters” for some genuine ways to strike up a conversation about your photography business wherever you are.
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
What if you could turn your everyday activities (like grocery shopping or heading to Target) into marketing activities for your photography business?
Today I’m going to show you how I learned to book new clients everywhere I go!
Hit play to learn how to start a natural conversation about your business with anyone.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-121
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://keap.li/FbZGyz
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
Did you know you can actually CONTROL how many competitors you have?
Yes, seriously! It’s in YOUR control.
Hit play to learn how I figured out what made me so special and different that my competition totally disappeared.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-120
SHOW TRANSCRIPT:
http://keap.li/durik8
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
Check out my latest how to videos:
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/worth-every-penny-joycast/id1513676756
After losing her full-time job, mom-of-4 Keilynn White followed her husband’s advice and went ALL IN on her photography business.
But a year later, her business still wasn’t making any money. She felt stuck, discouraged, and frustrated.
Thankfully, that’s when something changed. (Something BIG.)
Hit play to learn how my student Keilynn went from making zero money her first year to running a highly profitable boutique photography business!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-119
EPISODE TRANSCRIPT:
http://keap.li/yRWMxk
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Head over here to check out 3 NEW videos a week: https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
I used to think that if I went on vacation, that meant taking time away from my business.
It was so scary!
But let me tell you something…
As a photographer, you NEED to step away from the grind once in a while. It’s GOOD for you and your creative juices.
Plus, there are actually some business-building things you can do on vacation that don’t feel like work AT ALL!
Hit play to learn 3 ways to grow your business from anywhere in the world!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-118
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Head over here to check out 3 NEW videos a week: https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
When I started my photography business, the last thing I wanted to be was pushy or salesy.
So I sent my clients off on their own to decide what prints to order on their own time… they were busy mommas, and I thought that was serving them!
But I was WRONG.
If you’re using online galleries you’re doing what I was - causing decision fatigue for my clients and ruining any chance I had to make a meaningful income from my business.
Yikes.
After noticing a pattern of my clients locking up and never ordering prints (even though they wanted to), I decided to revamp my system.
And BAM - I found a WAY better way to serve my clients, increase my profit, and grow my business long-term!
Hit play to learn why online galleries are killing your business and what to do instead.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-117
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Head over here to check out 3 NEW videos a week: https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Decades after picking up her first camera at age 10, Dawn couldn’t shake her dream of finding a way to earn money with photography.
So with her kids grown, she decided to give it a go.
But after a few years of trying to figure it out on her own… her photography business was going nowhere.
She was frustrated and struggling to trust her talent as a photographer (ever been there?)
Thankfully, after getting the right systems in place, she turned everything around and landed her very first “Julie”!
What changed the game for her? That’s what she’s sharing with us today.
Hit play to learn how Dawn turned her love of photography into a business that allows her to spend time with her grandkids.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-116
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Head over here to check out 3 NEW videos a week: https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
LOVE THE SHOW?
Subscribe & Review on Apple Podcasts
Momentum is something we all want (and need). But where do you find it?
Thankfully, I stumbled on the greatest momentum trick ever when cleaning out my garage!
And that trick can help your photography business right now.
Hit play to learn the two keys you need in order to generate consistent momentum as a boutique portrait photographer.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-115
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8-WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by
becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Head over here to check out 3 NEW videos a week: https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
I am still flying high because of a top-secret marketing event I took my 3 kids and my college intern to last week. There were only 800 people at the event, but I snuck a few of my big takeaways out for you so that you can use them in your photography business right now. Hit play for all the secrets.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-114
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I paid for my 3 kids to go to college and saved for retirement working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Subscribe for 3 new videos a week.
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
A homeschooling mom-of-three, Ashlie, started out as a crime scene photographer. But once her youngest became a toddler, she decided she was ready to go full-time with her own portrait photography business. Yet nothing was working. Ashlie wasn’t quite sure how to tell her husband about the hole she’d gotten herself into… And then it got interesting ;) Her husband started seeing $1000+ deposits streaming into their joint bank account. What did she do to turn her photography business around? You’re not going to BELIEVE Ashlie’s story. Hit play to tune in. RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES: www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-113 BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography: https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook FREE FACEBOOK GROUP: Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer. https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals YOUTUBE: I relaunched my YouTube channel. Subscribe for 3 new videos a week. https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
When I was a brand-new photographer, it happened.
When I told the father of one of my daughter’s friends that I was a professional photographer …
HE SMIRKED.
I was livid. Embarrassed. Ashamed.
Has that ever happened to you?
What I’ve figured out is that to some people, photography looks like a hobby, not a career.
It’s not their fault. They just don’t know what career photographers put into our work!
Hit play to hear what do I do now to command the respect I deserve as a photographer.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-112
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Subscribe for 3 new videos a week.
You’re busy. And that’s AWESOME because that means you’re succeeding in what you love - photography!
But at a certain point of busyness, you just have nothing left to give.
Should you start taking fewer clients? It depends.
If you’re so busy with great clients and want to keep growing so you can give your family all the little extras …
(and treat yourself, too!) …
It might be time to hire your first employee!
I get it, hiring someone for your team/business can be difficult and mind-boggling if you don’t know exactly who you need.
Pop in your earbuds and hit play so I can help you figure it out in.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-111
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Subscribe for 3 new videos a week.
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
Ever said to yourself, “Oh, I'm too old for that.” That’s what my student Cheryl told herself.
Photography had become an expensive hobby as she chased her 4 kids around photographing their sports.
Yet as the kids grew up, Cheryl found she had more time for herself.
Was she too old to pursue a business as a photographer?
Hit play to hear how Cheryl discovered her gift and a new career that satisfies her.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-110
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
YOUTUBE:
I relaunched my YouTube channel. Subscribe for 3 new videos a week.
https://www.youtube.com/c/thejoyofmarketing
I don't know about you, but I know that when I don't hit my goals things in my head start to get messy and the bully in there gets vicious. So today, I have the solution to make you "psychologically bulletproof." If you're beating yourself up and you need a little protection from any bad experience you've had, press play.
RESOURCES:
BOOK: THE GAP AND THE GAIN
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-109
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
My student Cindy had TONS of competition, or so she thought. So she was busting her butt for $300 orders. And totally burned out.
“I thought I was serving my clients, but I wasn’t serving myself.”
When she switched her business model to boutique, she was floored …
$15K in 4 months???
With all that “competition?”
Yes, yes YES!!
Hit play to hear how she did it.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-108
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
There’s a powerful exercise I love doing with my students when they get stuck in the buts.
I’m not talking about anatomy here…this is a G rated podcast!
The buts I’m talking about on this podcast are the buts that your mind comes up. You know you’ve got them. They are all the reasons why you tell yourself you can’t have what you want.
Hit play to hear me doing this exercise with 600 students at my annual 3-day LIVE experience, Go Boutique Live, and can start removing the buts in your life.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-107
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Have you ever wondered what it would be like to visit my photography studio in Springfield, Illinois? Twice a year I welcome a group of boutique photographers in for 2 days. And this week is the first time this year my students will be here. So what happens when they visit? Hit play for a sneak peek of what is about to happen for these 150 photographers when they come to town and to learn how you can visit, too.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-106
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Angela was always “that mom with a camera.”
A stay-at-home-mom, she did photography as a hobby, hoping she’d one day turn her side gig into a real business.
She had a TON of equipment …
But measly sales.
And no idea how to “level up.”
Her hubby told her if she wanted to make her photography into a real business, she’d have to just “figure it out.”
She didn’t listen.
And he was the FIRST person she called when she got her first $3,000 order - LOL!
What changed?
Listen now to this week’s episode to find out.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-104
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Christina was a hard-working mom of five who had to put her photography business on hold because it was taking over everything. There was tension between her and her husband… There was never enough time for the kids…
She was so stressed her hair was literally FALLING OUT.
So she put her family first - and quit for 2 years!
But she MISSED having a creative outlet. A purpose. A passion.
She had to find a way to build a business that would work around her kids, not the other way around.
Pop in your earbuds and find out how Christina got her groove back (and THREE $1k+ clients FAST).
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-104
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Are you a photographer who dreams of having a photography studio? Go, you! My goal today is to save you from jumping into a studio before you’re ready. Hit play to learn what to do first to get your business ready for this next big step.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-103
FREE, 5 Day, Pain-Free Pricing Challenge
April 18 – 22, 2022
www.joyofmarketing.com/pricingchallenge
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
TAX WEEK TAX WEEK. There is no way around paying taxes if you run a profitable business and you live in the United States of America. As my businesses have grown over the years and my income has gone up, I’ve come to dread this week. It’s the week where I can expect a call from the accountant telling me what I owe. Queue tears, panic, disappointment. In the early years of Sarah Petty Photography, I often owed money that I didn’t have. So whether you’ve been there or not, you likely will be in the future now that you’re growing your photography business. Today’s podcast is to give you perspective to not only help you survive this week, but to get through it feeling good about yourself and where your business is going. Listen now!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-102
Pain-Free Pricing Challenge
April 18 – 22, 2022
www.joyofmarketing.com/pricingchallenge
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Jennifer Tobicoe is a Chicago-based mom of grown kids who wanted to make a career change after her divorce. The problem: she suffered from severe panic attacks. Gripped by fear even answering the phone when an unknown caller was on the other end, she wondered how she would ever be able to be a photographer. Today, Jennifer shares her inspiring story of how she gained confidence for the first time in her life and had two nearly $2,000 portrait orders. Press play to find out how Jennifer is building her photography business and her confidence from the ground up.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-101
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
I don’t remember ever thinking I’d own a portrait photography business when I grew up. But then I hit my 30’s, had twins and wanted the time freedom and income potential that starting a photography business could give me. I wanted to be the mom who had a career I loved AND be at everything my kids were involved in. Now, after over 2 decades of owning 2 businesses, I’ve learned a lot of lessons. So today, I’m sharing 7 things I would do differently if I started my photography business over. And I guarantee these tips aren’t what you expect.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-100
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Carys Rouleau was a Canadian midwife who spent the last year and a half getting back into photography so that she could have better working hours and more time with her 4-year old son. Today she’s sharing her story of how she went from building her portfolio with free sessions to getting $3,400 client orders as a boutique photographer, and how she overcame her fear of pricing herself out of working with nice clients. Pop in your earbuds and press play!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-99
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
After earning a degree in painting from Northwestern University, Jill Liebhaber accidentally fell into a career as a portrait photographer. What started as a job working in a portrait studio turned into a love for photographing kids that led Jill to open her own boutique portrait studio in Chicago. Press play to hear Jill’s journey as a single woman who has supported herself on her income from Jookie, her boutique portrait photography studio, for 16 years.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-98
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
One year ago, he hated his career at a tech firm so much that the Sunday Scaries had started on Saturday. He dreaded Mondays and the job that was sucking the life out of him. Every weekend, he’d squeeze in photography sessions, dreaming of what life as a career photographer would look like, but the math didn’t make sense. At $300-$500 per session, he couldn’t cover the mortgage. Now, a year later, Darren Elias is crushing it as a career photographer who has replaced his income from that full- time job he hated and gone all in on boutique. Press play to hear his story.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-97
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM – DM Me “Pricing Rules” For a Copy of My 11 Rules for Pricing Boutique Photography:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FREE FACEBOOK GROUP:
Join and get my free mini-class: How I earned $1,500 per client working 16 hours a week by becoming a boutique photographer.
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
It’s no surprise that our first-time $100K Yay Award winners from 2021 had so many tips on how they broke the $100,000 in revenue using the boutique model that we had to turn this into a two part series. Friend, if you haven’t broken $100,000 in revenue in your portrait photography business and have made it your goal to get there in 2022, hit play for these hot tips. Then model what you learn in your own boutique portrait photography business.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-96
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
A record number of my portrait photography coaching students hit $100K in 2021. Yep, in the middle of a global pandemic. Ever wonder how they make it rain Julies ($1k clients) … to the tune of nearly $10K a month?
Wonder no longer!
Today on the podcast, I’ve gathered up my newest group of $100K Yay! Award winners to share their best tips with YOU! If they can do it - YOU CAN, TOO! Hit play to start.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-95
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Los Angeles is the City of Angels…and former actress Kendra felt like she needed a miracle to get her photography business off the ground.
LA has almost as many photographers as actors, so Kendra was trying to out-discount her competition to stay in business. Things had gotten so bad, she couldn’t even pay herself!
But THEN, something happened that changed everything - and she got her first $6,300 client!
How’d she do it? That’s what we’re talking about today. Listen now.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-94
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
If things aren’t going as quickly or as smoothly as you’d like in your photography business, it might be because you aren’t 100% boutique in all 10 of these areas in your photography business. Today we’re going to walk through an assessment so you can score yourself on where your opportunities for improvement are. Be sure to DM me on Instagram @Sarah.Petty after this episode with your final score so I can see where you ended up! RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES: www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-93 Go Boutique Live TICKETS – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022 www.goboutiquelive.com BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough INSTAGRAM: https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook FACEBOOK GROUP: https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Ever feel like you are re-living the same low paying, work all the time life in the name of being able to have time with your family? That was me in the first few years of my business. I felt like I was stuck in Ground Hog Day, the movie. I ended each year SO empty. Exhausted. Tired. Cranky. And disappointed at my profits. Even as my revenue went up, I was STILL working all the time. I was learning so many lessons the hard way. OVER. And OVER. And OVER. Today, I’m sharing the magic tool that helped me get out of Ground Hog Day and stop repeating the same mistakes. RESOURCES: WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES: www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-92 Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022 www.goboutiquelive.com BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough INSTAGRAM: https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook FACEBOOK GROUP: https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
One of my favorite things to do is share stories of what my students have overcome to inspire you to keep going. I can't wait for you to meet Lindsey Linhoff, a working photographer of 15 years who had always offered her clients digital files. In October, she decided to go all in on the boutique model. And within a few short weeks, she had 12 bookings and a $5,000 order! Hit play now to hear Lindsey’s journey. RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-91
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Here we sit at the beginning of the year and you might have some frustration from how last year ended. Wondering if how much you worked or how much of your heart and soul you put into your business was even worth it? Or maybe you are wondering if you are cut out for a life as a photographer or wondering where the proof is that this will work. I got that wrong for many years, and I want to straighten it out for you. Pop in your earbuds and let me explain.
RESOURCES:
FREE 5 DAY CHALLENGE
www.joyofmarketing.com/challenge
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-90\
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
It seems like at the start of a new year, everyone you do business with raises their prices. From your hair salon, to your trainer to your physical therapist and even your subscriptions. So as a photographer, should you raise your prices, too? Hit play today for some photography pricing tips for you.
RESOURCES:
FREE 5 DAY CHALLENGE
www.joyofmarketing.com/challenge
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-89
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Welcome back for part two of the two part series: 5 Phases of growing a photography business that fits your life.
In part one, I shared what those early phases of a boutique photography business look like, especially when you have a growing family. Now it’s time for part two where I’m an open book about how Sarah Petty Photography and my life shifted as my family grew. If you’re curious about what a two decade career as a professional photographer can look like for your boutique photography business, pop in your earbuds and get ready for a fun ride.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-88
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Balancing a business and a family, while super rewarding, is never easy. It is even harder when you have major life changes, like a pandemic, a new baby, or for me this year, my youngest child going off to college. Today, I want to share the 5 phases my photography business has gone through over the last 2 decades and what to pay attention to, no matter what phase you are in. You can have a photography business that fits your life, no matter what your family life currently looks like. Hit play to learn how.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-87
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
The holidays mean family time. Catching up with people you don't see every day, lots of food, fun, and sometimes drama. Your family wants to know what’s going on with your business. So what should you share? And what should you keep to yourself? Today I’ve got some tips for how you can not only talk to your family about your business, but also get them cheering for you! Pop in your earbuds and let’s do this!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-86
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Oh my goodness the holidays get expensive. And the last thing I want for any of us, is to go into debt for this. So today, I’m sharing one simple thing photographers can do before Christmas gets here to bring in extra revenue to cover all those last minute expenses. Even if you have a LOT on your plate right now and no time to shoot any sessions. The best part - it takes maybe 15 minutes. You ready? Let’s do it
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-85
Go Boutique Live TICKETS ON SALE – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Tax write offs, really? What even does that mean? Entrepreneurs are always talking at the end of the year about writing things off. Today, I am gonna dig into what it is and what it means for a photographer. And I’ll go through 4 categories of tax write offs that you may have overlooked.
Press play now and get ready to save some money!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-84
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
Go Boutique Live – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Ever you wish you could do more for the causes and charities that deeply move you? Do you long to make a bigger impact? I bet you do, friend. Because you’re a photographer, and I know that photographers have the biggest hearts on the planet. No matter what you’ve been through yourself, your heart is tugged to do more for others. So on today’s episode, I’m highlighting three of my students who are lifting up their favorite charities and causes as they grow their photography businesses. Press play for a few fresh ideas to spark your giving this season.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-83
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
Go Boutique Live – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
One of my favorite things to do is to share stories of what my students have overcome and their wins to inspire you to keep going. So today that’s what I’m doing. You’ll meet Samantha Hardcastle, a small town stay-at-home mom of 5 kids who officially opened her business in January and within months had a $5,000 order and is now building her own home studio! Say what? Press play to hear what Samantha’s journey has looked like from hobby photographer to profitable photographer-extraordinaire.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-82
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH – 8 WEEK WORKSHOP
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
Go Boutique Live – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
It is the holidays and it is the time of year when we all go shopping, whether we like it or not. I want to change how you look at shopping this holiday season and share 4 COMPLETELY FREE Ideas for how you can start to build relationships and help local businesses you love. Hit play now to jingle and mingle!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-81
FREE GRAPHICS:
DM me the word Local on Instagram @sarah.petty
I’ve got some fun free graphics for you to use on social media this holiday season to show your support for the local businesses you love.
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
Go Boutique Live – 3 Day event February 15-17, 2022
www.goboutiquelive.com
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
As a mom and a photography business owner, I love when I can slip into auto-pilot. It’s the mode that gets me through MANY hours when there is so much coming at me that it wouldn’t be humanly possible to get everything done without it. But here’s what I know happens when I spend too many of my days in auto-pilot in my business. It keeps me stuck, with little to no growth. So I’m going to share the shortcut I take a few times a year, when I notice my business is stalling.
Last year, my student Andrea Fleury, was a stay at home mom, feeling a little burnt out and needed something to spice things up to help find herself again. After a few failed attempts at photography, she’d convinced herself that it just wasn't meant for this lifetime. Then she decided to pick up her camera again. What happened next will amaze you. Tune in to hear how this dance studio owner turned pet photographer built a photography business she loves.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-79
FREE 30 Minute Training:
How I Paid For College For 3 Kids + Saved for Retirement Working 16 Hours / Week as a Boutique Photographer
www.joyofmarketing.com/watch
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Creating a really good photography price list can be complicated when you’re trying to figure it out on your own. You can try to copy another photographers’ prices, but what you don’t see are the DOZENS of little hinges that make a big difference in how much your photography clients invest with you. Little things that there’s no way you can understand about pricing unless you’ve spent years pouring over the strategy of pricing photography. Over the years I’ve critiqued THOUSANDS of photographers’ price lists. And very few of them get a 100%. Hit play to hear 9 price list improvements that you can make to your photography price list.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-78
FREE 30 Minute Training: How I Paid For College For 3 Kids + Saved for Retirement Working 16 Hours / Week as a Boutique Photographer
www.joyofmarketing.com/watch
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop:
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
When the career she thought she wanted turned out to be less than she’d imagined, my student Erin Lackey, slammed the brakes. This summer, she took a hard left once she realized that saying ‘yes’ to being an X-ray tech is less money than saying ‘yes’ to a photography client!” What she did about it will blow your mind. If you’re chained to a career that’s leaving you feeling ‘meh’ hit play now.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-77
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
If you’ve ever felt like you were meant for more in life, friend, this episode is for you.
Event planner to big names like Tony Robbins, Bari Baumgardner spent most of her life trying to avoid sales. When she finally overcame her head trash around selling, she was able to build the company of her dreams. I asked Bari to come on stage at my 3-Day event for boutique photographers, Go Boutique Live, and hundreds of photographers told me this was their FAVORITE presentation of the entire 3 days. Here’s part of her presentation from Go Boutique Live 2021.
On this episode you’ll learn:
- The muscle you need to build if you feel like you were meant for more
- What to do if you are unconfident when trying to sell your services
- How to overcome objections that hold your client and YOU back
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-76
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop starts October 19
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
GO BOUTIQUE LIVE 2022 – DATES COMING SOON
www.goboutiquelive.com
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Tony Robbins, arguably the biggest motivational speaker who ever lived, was the closing speaker at the four-day business and marketing conference I spoke at last week. Yes, little old me, mama of three college kids who's just a photographer, got asked to speak on the same stage as Tony Robbins. How amazing is that? Friend, if you're in a season where you're feeling stuck right now, here are five powerful shifts you can make today so that you can create the photography business you want for you and your family.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-75
5 Day Booking Boost – Free Challenge
www.joyofmarketing.com/bookingboost
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
There is an elephant in the room and I don’t want to tippy toe around this anymore. There’s a reason why the people you look up in business to have gotten to the top. And it’s because they picked the right mentor or coach for them. Along the way, I’ve chosen wrong and learned some expensive lessons. So I’ve developed a framework for choosing the right mentor and I hope you can use it to save time and money in choosing the right leader for where you are in your business right now.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-74
5 Day Booking Boost – Free Challenge
www.joyofmarketing.com/bookingboost
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
Literally, I bet you could ask every photography business owner what their biggest challenge is and they would say, “oh, my biz is good – I just need more customers.” If that’s you, I am going to tackle this one head on today. And I’m pretty sure what I have to say is going to surprise you.
So hit play now to learn what kind of marketing you should be doing if you’re a boutique portrait photographer and what marketing you need to stop doing right now.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
www.joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-73
5 Day Booking Boost – Free Challenge
www.joyofmarketing.com/bookingboost
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
When you’re a photographer trying to grow your business, it means a LOT of taking one step forward and then 2 steps back when life I happens. It’s kind of like trying to climb up a hill that’s covered with a greasy slip and slide! There’s a lot of guessing, stumbling, building up head trash, questioning yourself, working alone and trying to stay pumped up about the dream. So today, I’m sharing a SIMPLE solution for how I grew my business quickly. It will seem so obvious when you hear it, but if you’re not growing as quickly as you’d like, you’re probably ignoring it. Now let’s dig in.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-72
FREE 33 Minute Video Training:
How I Paid For College For 3 Kids + Saved for Retirement Working 16 Hours / Week as a Boutique Photographer
www.joyofmarketing.com/watch
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Do you ever feel like you just don’t have the right personality to get clients?
Are you constantly overthinking what you say to clients, feeling insecure that you’re going to mess it all up?
Well you’re not the only photographer who feels this way. If you identify with being more introverted than extroverted, you’re going to love what I’ve got for you today.
After coaching photographers for over a dozen years, I’ve found that introverts can actually do BETTER at business than extroverts. You heard me right! Now let’s dig in.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-71
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop starting SOON!
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
Which are you, friend? The tortoise or the hare? Over the years, I’ve learned that we all pretty much naturally identify as one or the other. So which is actually better if you're building a photography business? On today’s episode, I’m digging into what to do whether you’re the tortoise or the hare to keep your photography business moving forward without falling victim to comparison fatigue. Ready to dive in? Hit play!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-70
MIRRORLESS CAMERA GIVEAWAY ($2,500 value)
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
When someone cancelled an appointment with me recently and blamed it on a lack of childcare, it got me thinking about what family first actually means when you are a parent running a business. Family first is one of those things that’s easy to say…but is harder to actually LIVE when you’re serious about growing a photography business. I have super strong feelings on what family first REALLY means…and when people are using it as an excuse in business. Here’s what family first means to me and 3 tips for LIVING it without holding your business back from what’s possible.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://www.Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-69
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
BOUTIQUE BREAKTHROUGH 8-week workshop starting SOON!
www.joyofmarketing.com/boutiquebreakthrough
Which are you, friend? The tortoise or the hare? Over the years, I’ve learned that we all pretty much naturally identify as one or the other. So which is actually better if you're building a photography business? On today’s episode, I’m digging into what to do whether you’re the tortoise or the hare to keep your photography business moving forward without falling victim to comparison fatigue. Ready to dive in? Hit play!
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
https://www.Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-68
MIRRORLESS CAMERA GIVEAWAY ($2,500 value)
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
Have you ever wanted something SO badly, but it just doesn’t feel like it’s in the cards for you?
After being laid off, my student Tracy Lee Knuff decided to make Photography her main gig.
But 6 months later, she’d photographed 22 sessions and made $0.
Tracy was working all the time…pumping money back into her business and that’s when her husband gave her a deadline. He said, “Tracy, make it work or find a new job.”
What this remarkable woman did next will inspire you that anything is TRULY possible. Hit play for a mind-blowing story.
RESOURCES:
WORTH EVERY PENNY JOYCAST SHOW NOTES:
Joyofmarketing.com/podcast/episode-67
MIRRORLESS CAMERA GIVEAWAY ($2,500 value)
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
INSTAGRAM:
https://www.instagram.com/sarah.petty
FREE COPY: NEW YORK TIMES BEST SELLING BOOK FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS
www.joyofmarketing.com/freebook
FACEBOOK GROUP:
https://www.facebook.com/groups/ditchthedigitals
When I had my twins, I immediately knew I wanted another baby because all I could think about was them both leaving me for college at the same time! Last week, that THIRD baby packed up her car and headed from IL to Florida for college. As I wiped my tears, I realized that over the last 21 years, I spent an inordinate amount of time prepping my kiddos to leave the nest and to be independent and successful when their time comes. So here are 4 things I did a little differently because I’m an entrepreneur that might just help you as you prepare your kiddos for independence, no matter what age they are. Let’s dive in!
You definitely don’t need a photography studio to be a photographer and I’m living proof of that.
In my 23 years as professional photographer, I’ve been both with and without a studio. But when I got kicked out of my 3rd studio a few years ago, I definitely wasn’t expecting it.
Here’s what I did to stay in business when a big hurdle was thrown my way.
Today I’m sharing 4 steps I hope will help you when you find yourself in an unexpected and uncomfortable situation.
Pop in your earbuds for some tips you don’t even realize you need.
Today we’re going behind the scenes with professional portrait photographer / early childhood educator, Shalicia Johnson, because she just got her first Julie – a $3,501.25 order!
You may be wondering what the heck is a Julie? In our community of professional portrait photographers, a Julie is a photography client who invests over $1,000 in printed portraits. And we celebrate like crazy when portrait photographers get their first Julie because we know if they can get one $1,000 portrait order, they can do it over and over again. We even give out a special Julie Award at our annual 3-Day event, Go Boutique Live, to all students who get their $1,000+ client.
So pop in your earbuds and hit play to hear Shalicia’s story of how she got her first Julie, what’s changed for her since then, and how you can start getting Julie’s, too!
Major life changes. Whether we’ve planned for them or never saw them coming, we all experience them.
- A job loss or career change.
- A cross-country move.
- A new baby.
- A health issue.
We’ve all been there. And as photography business owners, we may need to put your business on the back burner to attend to these life changes. That’s why I developed the parking lot tool. Today I’m sharing how you can use this tool to get back to your photography business faster when life needed you to pull over. Let’s do this.
Dear photographer who is ashamed by how little you make right now from your photography.
I see the crazy hours you’re putting in.
I see you agonizing over your prices.
I see the gorgeous images you create for your clients.
And I also see things you don’t. I see you taking the risk of being in business for yourself and forgoing the guaranteed paycheck, benefits and vacation. And because of those risks, I FIRMLY believe, you are justified in earning a higher wage. If you are frustrated by how little you are making and how much you are working, you NEED to listen to this today.
Sometimes the thing that gets you the most PUMPED and lights your pants on fire to TAKE ACTION is to hear how somebody JUST LIKE YOU really did it.
And when I say really did it, I’m talking about one of my students who was a shoot and burn photographer who took her average client orders from $200 to over $2,000 working very part-time at her photography business.
Her name is Andee Anderton and I'm so excited for you to meet her. Andee is a momma of 2 precious girls under 3, who’s growing a photography business that provides for her family while being present at the same time.
Not too long ago, she was in the same spot you’re in right now:
- Struggling with the business part…but LOVING the photography.
- Answering inquiries for sessions through FB messenger and agonizing over whether to tell them $200 or $175 for a session.
- Feeling down when client after client ghosts her after she shares prices.
Pop in your earbuds to hear Andee’s inspiring story of what she did to get to where she is now.
I made so many excuses for why I couldn’t succeed in my photography business.
Over and over those first few years.
And then I wondered why things weren’t working.
This was my story until I remembered something I picked up from my dad.
Today, I’m taking you deep into what I learned from him and what happened when I stopped making 7 key excuses.
I’ll show you how I broke through them one at a time, so you can, too.
Hit play now!
Oh my gosh, wait until you hear this conversation with my coaching student and six figure photography business owner, Jill Daugherty.
I invited Jill on the Joycast because I know her story is like so many of yours. As a portrait photographer with a lot of competition and four super active kids, Jill found herself constantly frazzled, doubting herself and stretching herself so thin. She realized she needed to find a different path for her business if she was going to be the mom, the wife and the photographer, she wanted to be.
In this episode, Jill takes us along her journey over the past few years of growing her confidence and a six figure portrait photography studio in a rural area that is jam packed with good photographers.
In just the last few months, Jill has been able to purchase a new minivan, pay off her studio build out without taking on debt, invest in new lighting equipment and get a new laptop. This conversation with Jill will inspire you and leave you with actions to take to start implementing today. Hit play and let’s get you pumped!
Why do we keep shoving things that don’t fit into our lives as adults?
The harder we push, the worse it gets.
Like adding the wrong clients into the wrong model and hoping it will all fit into the way you dreamed your life and your photography business would look like.
If you wonder why you’re working all the time and not making any money…this episode is for you, friend.
I’ll show you 4 changes you can make to your photography business to BOOST your portrait orders.
What could you do with an extra $1,000? What about an extra $3,000? A lot, right?
There are times when you need cash for something you want in life and you don’t have a pile of money sitting there to make it happen.
Whether it’s a family vacation, school tuition for your kiddo, new gear, or an education opportunity to improve your skills, today I’m sharing a few of my favorite, little known ways to use your photography business, and even things you already HAVE, to generate the cash you need for the things you want.
And while I’m at it, I want to let you in on a little secret. My signature 8-week workshop, Boutique Breakthrough, is starting soon. So the ideas I’m sharing today are also here to support those of you who want to enroll.
Grab a pen and paper and hit play because this is gonna get good;-)
Eventually every photographer hits a ceiling and their photography business growth slows. It happens because our current skillset can only get us so far.
If you’re wondering:
- How can some people grow a bigger photography business than others?
- Why some photographers grow faster than others?
- Why really talented photographers struggle to grow their business?
Hit play now to hear three big aha’s from photographers who are in growth mode.
During the pandemic, Jean Lachat unexpectedly lost her well-paying 9-5 job with benefits and paid vacation. It was a really scary time.
On this episode of the joycast, Jean joins me to share how she recovered and DOUBLED her salary by building a portrait photography business in suburban Chicago, Illinois (despite the world being shut down).
If you are working for someone else and hating it, hit play to get inspired like nothing else.
You may not know, but I played college volleyball at Memphis State (now the University of Memphis). What I didn’t realize until recently since I have been spending so much of my time watching my daughters play volleyball, is how much the mindset I developed as a college volleyball player impacted how quickly I was able to grow my photography business.
So today, I’m going to share 3 tips to help you develop an athlete mindset (like I did) so you can get your photography business on the growth fast track.
I truly believe that if you can master these, you will see dramatic growth in your photography business. Hit play if you’re ready to grow!
If only you could read your photography clients’ minds, am I right?
Well, with a few easy tweaks to how you talk about what you do as a professional photographer, you will not only know exactly what your photography clients want, but you’ll find it gets easier and easier to book them for sessions and sell your products, too.
Today I’m sharing 4 things you can do to help your photography clients get what they want (photos of the people and pets they love) and you can get what you need (revenue to keep growing your photography business and allowing you to put #familyfirst). So what are you waiting for? Hit play now!
What the heck are you supposed to when your photography business is slow? Well here’s a hot idea. How about a Pooch Playoff?
Earlier this year, several my Peak Performance coaching students kicked off a pet photography promotion to raise money for pet charities while growing their photography businesses at the same time.
Collectively these professional photographers have photographed over 100 sessions, generated tens of thousands of dollars in income and donated thousands of dollars to their charities.
Today I’m joined by one of my Peak Performance coaches and 6-figure photography business owner, Jill Gray, to talk about the promotion she created, Pooch Playoffs. You’ll learn what this pet promotion looked like and the results of this fun campaign during the slow season.
Does approaching and marketing to a potential photography client who you'd love to photograph make you feel creepy?
Marketing in your senior photography business can be hard.
Darren, one of my Peak Performers shared with me his struggles of starting conversations with high school seniors without feeling creepy on a recent laser coaching call for my Peak Performance coaching students.
Whether you're a guy, or an introverted photographer who doesn't feel confident starting a conversation, this is for you.
Here is how to talk to potential clients without the creep factor.
Today I’m talking about something every single photographer in the world can benefit from….can you guess?
It’s how to make today the best day ever.
I first shared these 4 steps in my opening program at Go Boutique Live, my 3-day live, business event for portrait photographers and it was a hands down favorite.
So whether your photography business is stuck in neutral or it’s got momentum and is starting to take off, click play to hear the 4 steps to help make today your best day ever.
Has this ever happened to you, photographer?
An unexpected, HUGE expense that you don’t know how you are ever going to pay for. It’s one of the most terrifying experiences an entrepreneur faces. Since I’ve had a photography business for 23 years now, it’s definitely happened to me a few times. So today I’m talking about how you can recover when it happens to you. Click play to tune in!
I want to welcome all my photographer friends back from my 3-day event for portrait photographers, Go Boutique Live, with a special recap show. In case you weren’t at the event, it was INTENSE, INSANE inspiration and growth! But to boil down 400 slides into a short podcast episode felt pretty impossible. So I asked the 1200 photographers who were there to give me their biggest life-changing lessons from the event. And here they are! From my community to you….here are the crème-de-a-crème Joy Nuggets from Go Boutique Live. Grab your notebook, pop in your earbuds and hit play.
For the last 15 years, I’ve worked side-by-side with Andria, my studio manager. She started with me as a photography intern while she was finishing up college. Once she graduated, I didn’t let her leave! So what does she do now as the studio manager of Sarah Petty Photography? How do we work together? What do her days look like? That’s what this confessions episode is all about.
Hit play to listen in.
Before the pandemic, she was shooting 550 sessions a year and running a $100k+ photography
business. But what Debra wanted more than anything was time with her growing family. She’d
been a professional photographer for years and was burned out by the late nights, long hours
and weekend sessions. How could she cut back to spend more time with her family, without
sacrificing her income?
On today’s podcast, I sat down with Peak Performer of the year, Debra Lawrence. You’ll hear
her story of how she went from photographing 68 clients in August of 2019 and never seeing
her family -- to photographing 3 clients in August of 2020 and earning the EXACT same income
AND putting her family first. Hit play now to hear how it all happened for Debra.
Ever find yourself worrying about every possible outcome? Recently, a photographer asked me How to grow thicker skin so she could stop worrying so much. I think it’s something that many of us struggle with personally. But in a professional setting, with the pressure of selling your photos to someone, it amplifies all of the feelings (cue the tears). It hurts when we mess up or someone criticizes our photography business. We put so much of ourselves into it that it FEELS personal, even if it is just business. Now that I’m 23 years into my photography career, I’ve changed A LOT in how I view and respond to negative comments AND have EVEN OVERCOME MY FEAR OF GETTING THOSE NEGATIVE COMMENTS. Today, I’ll share my tips for what I do when someone puts me down AND what do to about your own fears that keep you stuck.
How the heck did they do it? Here’s part 2 of our advice series with my $100k Yay Award Winning boutique photographers. You’ll hear directly from them their #1 piece of advice for getting to $100k a year in your portrait photography business.
I believe one of the most powerful things to see is ordinary people doing extraordinary things. These photographers are just like you– juggling life, family, studio rent, bills with a love for making photos and wanting time freedom and flexibility to put family first. And it’s happening for them. I want this for you, too, and I hope this series showed you that it’s possible no matter where you live or what obstacles have been put in front of you. And next year, I hope to be giving YOU a $100k Yay award on my stage at Go Boutique Live.
And if you haven’t listened to part one yet, go back and listen for amazing advice from photographers in all stages of their photography journey. Press play for part 2.
As you’re listening to this episode, I’m in Charlotte, NC getting ready to step on stage in front of 1200 boutique photographers for our once a year, 3-day event, Go Boutique Live. One of my favorite parts of the event is when we get to honor boutique photographers with the YAY awards. We give awards for a lot of things – from you first one thousand dollar client (a Julie) to raising $1k for charity, reaching $10k in sales for the year and $50k in sales for the year. But the highest honor a photographer can earn is the award for $100k or more in sales of portraits from January – December. This year we have more $100k Yay award winners than ever before, despite 2020 being the year of a pandemic. How did they do it? I’ve asked these incredible photographers to share their advice for reaching $100k in your photography business. Press play now to hear part one of this two part series.
As if it wasn’t bad enough that her husband left her for another woman, COVID hit and Colleen Carlson was stuck with a huge mortgage, back taxes and had to return $20,000 in wedding and mitzva deposits. All while raising 2 teenagers on her own who were hurting, too. With a failing photography business as her only income source, Colleen took a leap of faith. In 3 months, she’d sold $45,000 of her photography. On today’s podcast, you’ll hear a very personal story from a woman who will inspire you, no matter where you are in your photography journey. Hit play now and be prepared to be lifted up by one of the strongest women I know.
If I were to credit a key decision that has helped my business grow, it would be the decision to hire interns. I’ve always loved mentoring teenagers, especially teenage girls. Back in my ad agency days, the owners would always assign the interns to me because they knew it was my jam. Now, two of my first-ever interns, Andria and Erin, help run my companies. So today, I’ve asked my two current interns, Marley and Sam, to join me. We’re talking about what makes a good intern, how to find interns for your photography business and what interns are looking for before they say YES to working with you.
When Allison Gallagher made the switch from digital files to boutique, she lost 75% of her clients and the rejection and self-doubt floodgates swung open. She wanted so badly to be a good example to her 9-year old daughter as a business owner and felt like she was failing at that. Over the last 3 years, Alison and I have been on a rollercoaster together. In this conversation, we’ll chat about how she pushed through all the no’s and opened her first photography studio and how her relationship with her daughter has blossomed along with her income. Meet my student, Allison Gallagher.
I have often heard from photographers that they feel tremendous pressure to turn their client artwork around quickly. It seems like you are overserving your clients the faster you deliver their photos, doesn’t it? Well…not exactly. If you’re feeling the pressure to turn your orders around faster, you don’t want to miss this episode. I’ll reposition how you look at the timeline of a boutique client so that you can stop feeling so stressed and set realistic expectations for YOU and YOUR client on when their portrait order will be delivered. Let’s do this!
It’s been a hard go of it for so many people in our world these last 10 months, our photography community included. There are days when we look around and all we see is chaos and uncertainty, making it hard to get out of our own heads to dream of what our photography business could be. It’s times like these when you need a story to lean on for hope and I’ve got one for you. Meet my student, Tracey Beer. Tracey was at a really low point in 2020. Her husband had just lost his job. She was at a crossroads when she made the decision to lean IN to letting her photography business solve the problems she was facing. And it changed everything! This is her story of how she turned her struggle into a gift. And I have a feeling it’s just what you need to hear today.
I’ve got a question for you. Do you ever feel like your world is spinning out of control? That there’s more on your to do list to get done than you could finish in a lifetime? If you’re looking around at all the piles and feeling shaky about where to even start, this episode is for you. Hit play to learn my favorite tool for getting things to calm down around me and to feel like I’m in control again.
Each year, I spend the first week of the year throwing everything in my life under the microscope and getting real about what went well, what didn’t go as planned and what really sucked. Nothing is off the table – relationships, health, photography business, team, house, family. I feel like when I’m in it, I put my head down and get through it. But when my photography business slows down in January, I can be more honest with myself. I want to take our time together today to REALLY encourage you to spend some time on your goals for 2021 and to be honest about what you want. You may be feeling beat up, exhausted, in quarantine even. Being in business 23 years, if I have learned one thing it is that while we aren’t in control of the world, the environment or the economy, we are in control of our effort and attitude. We can focus on us and our business and serving our clients and we can accomplish any of our goals in ANY environment. We call that making our own economy and that starts with solid goal setting. Hit play to learn 7 things to do this month to make next year better for your photography business, your family, and you.
Thinking about a rebrand for your photography business? If a new logo or changing your business name has been on your mind friend, I’ve got you.
On this episode, I’m letting you listen in on a recent coaching session with one of my super successful Peak Performance coaching students, Jenn Kerfeld. Jenn was questioning whether now was a good time for a rebrand.
You’ll hear the questions I ask her to help her decide if rebranding a successful studio is the right move. Here’s your chance to see what an unscripted, unedited coaching session is like with me. Ready to rebrand? Hit play.
I’ve never met a man as extreme about his goals as my friend Bart Miller. He and his wife, Sunny, are among the top 1% of Amazon resellers in the world, together they run the largest online make up school in the world, and he’s made it to the elite levels of body-building, cycling and calf roping. ALL 3! He’s ‘that’ guy. Inspiring doesn’t even cut it … he’s AMAZING!!! This past year, I asked Bart to come on stage at my event for boutique photographers, Go Boutique Live, to show photographers how you can achieve high performance, like he has, in the fastest way possible. If you’re frustrated with how much time you’re spending on your photography business and not getting anywhere, Bart’s advice can help. So hit play and you’ll learn a few of Bart’s high-performance secrets like: * Where to find your performance-supercharger * Questions that lead to REALLY grabbing your goals * The “secret sauce” that finally, actually delivers results * Seeing into your future without a crystal ball * The poison you don’t know you’re taking
What should my domain name be? How many images do I choose? Do I need a logo or just my business name in a font? What color palette should I use? Should I buy a template or get a custom site built? What’s a good tagline? Do I include all my prices? What the heck do I do about SEO? AHHHHHH. Does thinking about your photography website stress you out? If so, then this episode is for you, friend. I’ve jammed it full of the dos and don’t of building a website for your photography business. And there’s even a checklist of quick fixes you can download to get your website picture perfect RIGHT NOW. Let’s do this!
Friend, have you ever wondered if the way you grew up is holding you back from becoming your authentic self and succeeding in your business? Today, I’m chatting with my student, Connie Lynch about that and so much more. Connie’s father was a driven businessman who wasn’t home much. When her father’s version of success rubbed off on her, Connie was afraid that if she was successful with her photography business, she wouldn’t be around for her family.
I wish I could bottle Connie up and spread her around the world so this podcast is how I’m doing that. Connie’s a military spouse with an often-deployed husband and a mom of 2 kiddos. You’ll hear here Connie’s tips for managing your schedule like a boss when you’re growing a boutique photography business, have kids at home and want date nights with your hubby. Get ready to fall in love and be inspired on today’s episode.
It doesn't matter if success in your photography business means 6 figures a year or just a little extra cash to take a vacation or make things not so tight all the time. If you’ve got kids, you want THEM to go for THEIR biggest, boldest goals and create a life even more amazing than yours. But what kind of example are you setting for them? If you want to SHOW your kiddo that if you can go for your dreams, they can go for their dreams, I’ve got 4 tips for you today so press play. Your kiddos will thank you for this one!
Author, researcher, mom, wife, inventor, coach, CEO…these are just a few of the roles my friend, Annie Grace, plays each day. You may have seen Annie on Good Morning America or in People Magazine because what she does is really revolutionary. And that’s why I asked her to speak at my 2 day event for boutique photographers, Go Boutique Live, last February. I wasn’t surprised when her program was one of the highest-rated, so I asked Annie if I could share some of the highlights on the podcast today for those of you who weren’t there with us in Texas. Of course she said yes! Annie’s best-known for teaching people how to have freedom in their relationship with alcohol. And her techniques will work to free yourself from ANY limiting belief and head trash you’ve built up. She actually learned to rewire her brain after she hit a serious bump in her otherwise fantastic life. She had a great career traveling first-class around the globe. A great marriage. Wonderful kids. She had IT ALL. But she had become a serious alcoholic. Like, a “screwdrivers at 6 a.m.” type of alcoholic. And she didn’t know WHY. So she spent a year diving into the SCIENCE behind WHY she was drinking and she uncovered a lot more along the way that can help YOU in your photography business. So press play if you want to learn how to grow your brain to be a better marketer using the same techniques she’s taught hundreds of thousands of people around the world. This stuff really works!
It’s been 9 months since we hosted our first ever LIVE, in person conference for boutique portrait photographers who dream of something bigger. It was amazing. The energy was infectious. The community was full of camaraderie. Watching 300 photographers come together in one room, believe in themselves, set goals for their business, and leave with a plan was EXACTLY what the photography industry needs more of right now. But how do we do that in the middle of a global pandemic? More than anything, we need connection. We need to be together and inspired to keep going as we head into a new year. We need to heal and grow together. We need a ‘space’ where you can sit next to another boutique photographer and help each other out. So here’s what we did to make that happen. We slapped $75,000 on the table and told one of the most AMAZING celebrity event teams in the world, “Hey, we gotta move mountains this year. You in?” They were. We are. Now you’re about to be, too. This episode is for you if you want to call the shots in YOUR OWN LIFE & photography business in 2021, no matter what the economy, remote schooling or the pandemic throws your way.
Hey I hear you. 2020 has been a dumpster fire for everything you planned. So you might be thinking, what do I have to lose? I’ll have a black Friday sale in my photography business to try to recover. I mean who doesn’t love BLACK FRIDAY, right? Especially when you can score a $850 tv for 200 bucks. ! So why not jump in on it to the doorbuster dash and grab some of the money being thrown around for your photography business? And that really is a logical argument, especially this year, but there’s more to it than that. So hear me out. This topic is a hot one….especially because Black Friday is FUN. That feeling you get when you load up on 3 pair of jeans and 2 sweatshirts for 85% off….it’s pretty awesome! But let me tell you, having a Black Friday sale in your photography business is a terrible idea if you’re boutique or have the desire to ever go boutique. I’m not going to sugar coat this. I have strong opinions so today I’m going to dig into what NOT to do on Black Friday and what to do instead.
An action plan for managing mini-sessions right now. What happens if you say no to photography mini-sessions during the busy holiday portrait season? Jen Pisani is one of my students who did just that. If you’re a photographer who relies on mini-sessions to keep busy this time of year, hit play now. Jen has joined me for this episode to chat about what it’s like to say no to something your clients expect you to do and how to create space and time for your family without sacrificing your photography income. I think you’ll be surprised by my chat with Jen.
Money. As soon as you hear it do you feel Icky? Greedy? Shameful? Materialistic? Maybe you feel like you have to hide the fact that you make so little money in your photography business, so you spend money you don’t have to look like you make more. Or, maybe you think you make too much money, so you try to hide THAT! As a society, there’s this belief that rich people are BAD. Heck, even in Hollywood, the star of the movie is usually the evil, wealthy entrepreneur so that adds to the guilt and shame surrounding money. So, as photography business owners, how do we reconcile that it is ok to make money with photography? How can we avoid feeling guilty about making it, spending it, saving it and giving it? Well that’s what today’s podcast is all about. Let’s dig in!
Now, for today’s podcast, I’ve got a little twist for you. If you’ve been listening for a while, you know that 10 years ago I applied for the trademark for this joycast. But friends, it took me TEN years to put this show out into the world for your ears to hear. Needless to say, my team and I are pretty stoked to make it to 25 episodes given how long it took to get this launched. I’ve heard the average podcast doesn’t make it to 15 episodes, so to celebrate this little milestone, I’m sharing 25 unexpected lessons that helped me grow my photography business into more than I ever dreamed of over the last 22 years. I hope you write down your favorites and implement them into your life so you can increase the speed at which you succeed. So press play now, and let’s do this.
I see you over there blowing up Google with questions about your photography business card. What should my business card say? Should it have one photo or many photos? Or maybe I’ll just have my phone number and email on thick paper or ooh, even wood? STOP. There’s a reason why your business card hasn’t magically sprinkled sessions all over your calendar. And that’s what I’m going to share with you on this episode of the Joycast. Let’s do this!
Friend, we need to talk about a certain someone in your life. The one who puts you down and tells you that you aren’t good enough. The one who knows all your greatest fears, doubts and insecurities and throws them in your face. The one who constantly reminds you of all the reasons “people like you” can’t succeed in a photography business. Look, I know where that mean bully lives who is holding you back and so do you. And on this episode, I’m going to help you call her out and get control over what she’s doing to your life. So tap play and let’s do this.
So you’re booking sessions…but the clients who are booking you aren’t exactly your dream client. You’re probably thinking that since you aren’t living a fancy lifestyle, it’s just not in the cards for you to get better clients who want all the things. Not true, my friend. It’s time to kick those beliefs to the curb. Let’s talk about what you CAN do to get those dream clients to step in front of your camera. I’ve got 7 things to share that you can start doing today, without ADVERTISING, to get better clients booking you. Let’s do this.
Remember when you learned to swap a head in Photoshop? Aaaah. So satisfying, right? Now what about when you learned how to run a profitable photography business? Ooh, that takes SOOOO much LONGER, right? Decades even? At least that is what you’re telling yourself. That you can’t fully commit to growing or even starting your photography business because you don’t know enough yet. Well, friend, I’m here to tell you it’s time to STOP LEARNING. WHAT?! Did you hear me right? I know, someone with an MBA who TEACHES photographers is telling you to quit learning, but stay with me for a few minutes because this is going to give you a HUGE aha! Hit play to get started.
Raise your hand if you’ve ever heard me say something and thought “Oh Sarah, But I already know that. I’ve heard you say that before.” Look friend, no hard feelings. I know you aren’t a know-it-all. But be honest – you’ve probably thought this before, am I right? Well, here’s a truth bomb. There’s a pretty big difference between knowing something in your brain and actually living it with ease and joy. If your photography business isn’t quite where you want it to be, there’s a pretty good chance you’ve let yourself get STUCK at “I already know that” and haven’t truly mastered the boutique business model. In this podcast, I’m going to help you identify where you’ve gotten stuck and how to move to the next level of building your boutique photography business so you can experience the change you actually want. So what are you waiting for? Hit play!
Your stomach drops. The lump in your throat appears out of no where. And the tears – I’m not crying, you’re crying!. Another photographer you're friends with just got a $5k order. And as much as you want to celebrate with her, the volume on your own head trash is up to level 10. What’s wrong with ME? How come I’m not getting orders like that yet? Is it my prices? My marketing? My photography? Heck, maybe I should throw in the towel and go sell essential oils!? Friend, I know you’ve gone down the spiral of comparison before because you’re HUMAN! On today’s episode, I’m going to show you how to get out of this downward spiral once and for all and how to use comparison to LIFT YOU UP instead of pulling you down. If you’re comparing yourself to other photographers and harshly judging yourself, let’s hang out today.
This may sound a little bit savage, but hear me out because the coach in me can’t help but get a little fired up when I see you out there dabbling with your photography business. Now before you say, “Who me?!” and snuggle back into being content to make whatever money falls in your lap from your photography this year, listen up. If you’re thinking about throwing in the towel for the year because your photography business hasn’t looked like you thought it would back in January. Pu-lease. No one’s photography business looks like we thought it would back in January, mine included. But here’s a little secret it took me a few years to learn. A portrait photographer makes ALL their profit from September – December. And in this episode, I’m going to show you HOW so that the last 4 months of the year completely turn your 2020 around. It’s SUPER juicy so grab your notebook and press play now.
Photographer, there are more reasons right now than ever to pull back or quit your photography business. The economy! COVID! I bet you’ve thought to yourself (ahem) “Businesses are closing and people are losing their jobs so I can’t grow a photography business!” Or maybe you’ve thought this one, “My kids are at home…I am the teacher and we’re sharing ONE computer so I can’t grow my photography business right now.” And not to point any fingers, but I see you over there thinking that “Nobody in my community is even leaving home because of the ‘rona so there are NO photography clients to hire me.” Well photographer friend, here’s the thing. We all look for proof of our false beliefs. We want to be right so darn bad that we’ll SELF-SABOTAGE our dreams. It’s a real phenomenon called confirmation bias. And it’s standing in the way of you and that photography business that you want. The business that can solve your money problems. The business that can even solve your relationship problems. And I’m going to show you how to kick confirmation bias to the curb. Once you do that, your photography business can actually start growing again. So press play and let’s do this!
Here’s something that may shock you. I don’t plan out my photography marketing more than a few months in advance. Now before you say, but Sarah, I’ve followed you for years. I know how much you love to plan. I’ve SEEN your photography marketing calendars. Let me explain. I’ve got 3 kids. My kids have tons of activities and I get their sports schedules a few months before the season starts. I run a second business, the joy of marketing, where I coach photographers and often cool opportunities come up that I want to go do. So if I tried to plan all my photography marketing a year at a time, none of it would actually happen on the exact day I planned for it to. On today’s episode, I’m going to share with what actually works better for me when it comes to planning my photography marketing. If you’re staring at a blank marketing plan, not sure where to start. Or you’re overwhelmed by the thought of planning past tomorrow due to all the uncertainty in the world right now, this episode is for you. I’m sharing one SIMPLE tool that I call the drip and the hammer. I learned back in my days at a marketing director at an ad agency and it literally changed everything for me. I’m pretty sure it will change how you look at your marketing moving forward, too. Get ready, friend. Let’s do this.
Friend, there’s nothing worse than being stuck in indecision prison. Let’s be real. There’s not a photography business owner on earth who hasn’t experienced it. But being paralyzed by indecision keeps us from doing a good job in ANY of our roles in life!! Parent. Spouse. Friend. Child. Photographer. So on part 2 of this joycast on How to Make Decisions When You’re Stuck, we’re diving a little bit deeper. I’m sharing 4 more tricks for breaking out of indecision prison. Because if you want to be: • A successful professional photographer… • A connected spouse … • A present parent… • And a kick-butt awesome human being… You can’t wait for a pardon from Indecision Prison. You’ve got to break out! Hit play and let’s do this.
Raise your hand if you’re in a season where even the simplest decisions trip you up. You’re exhausted, avoiding every flavor of decision from what to make for dinner to whether you should rebrand your photography business, create a new logo and change your prices. You’re stuck in a rut, seconds away from a toddler in Target meltdown and it feels pretty terrible. Friend, I’ve been there. And today I’m going to share a tool with you that I use to help me when I’m stuck. It centers me, reminds me of what’s important and serves as a filter to help me make decisions more quickly. Are you excited to learn it? Let’s do this!
Hey portrait photographer. What if I told you I could help you find a client who could afford your photography in the next few minutes….without EVER even stepping foot in your town. You’d probably say Sarah, you’re crazy. Well, friend, today’s your lucky day because I’m going to prove it to you right now. The truth is, no matter where you live, there are people with disposable income. You just haven’t learned HOW to look for them. So today I’m going to teach you a tool I created called “Follow the Mower” so you’ll know exactly where to go to find a portrait photography client who can afford you right now. Hit play and let’s get started!
Do you ever wonder if you can really make MONEY as a portrait photographer in a world of shoot-and-burners doing it cheaper? Or if the day will EVER come that you can replace your paycheck from the job you don’t even like with the money you’d make doing photography? If you’re like me, juggling family, life and all the things, you need some assurances that every second you pour into this photography business is worth your time, right? Even if you’re not looking for a 6-figure income from photography, you need to know what’s possible for YOU, in today’s world, in your market, as a professional portrait photographer. So on today’s episode we’re going to talk about how much a professional portrait photographer can make. Digging into all the good stuff like: * How to support an actual family on a photography income. * How to get profitable in DAYS, not YEARS. * Why what the average photographer makes is a lie.
I’m getting real with you today, friend. So click play if you’re ready to turn that love for photography into a business that actually pays the bills.
Failure is such a crazy thing for photographers isn’t it? It’s something we spend hours obsessing about before it even happens! We give it control over us to the point where we’re afraid to even “try” something. We’re consumed with what ifs. What if it doesn’t go well? What will people think of me? Even worse, I’ll feel bad, embarrassed, ashamed. And I don’t want those yucky feelings. So I avoid even trying. It doesn’t even matter if you just guessed at it or didn’t have any type of model to follow because we blame only ourselves for our failure. Fear of failure is real thing, friend. But there’s something you’ve NEVER been told about failure. So hit play and listen up if the F word has been tripping you up.
On a scale of 1-10 how true do you think this is? To be boutique and for clients to value what you do, you have to have an amazing photography studio. You’ve thought it right? We’ve all have. Convinced our clients will have sticker shock when they see our prices and then see our studio…or LACK of studio? So today I’m going to show you how you can be a boutique photographer without a studio. It’s easier than you think. You’ll see how my student, Sheila McCallister, is crushing it without a studio. And she has 5 kids! And if you’ve had a studio on your vision board forever… I’ll share how to know if you’re ready to take the plunge and become a studio owner. Click play and let’s dig in!
It saddens me how much guilt, shame and anxiety photographers have over selling their photography. You might be paralyzed by the fear of being rejected or heck, even just the thought of someone thinking you’re pushy or salesy. So instead of creating a business that serves your clients as well as YOU, you want to keep everyone happy and end up giving it all away or competing to be the cheapest. But instead of feeling good about keeping everyone happy, you start to resent your clients and your business because you’ve burned up your most valuable asset – your time. And the worst part, you have little or no money in the bank to show for it. I want to break down for you how S-E-L-L doesn’t have to be a 4-letter word if you come from a place of service. Stick with me because you’re going to get REALLY actionable steps to follow and by the end of this episode, you’ll see that not only are you helping your clients by selling to them, you actually have a moral obligation to do it. If you’re a photographer who hates to sell, press play now.
Your life has suddenly been thrown into a tailspin. Your children have descended upon you and every 5 minutes they need to be fed, need to use your computer for home schooling that you didn’t ever sign up for. They want you to play with them…to entertain them. It’s a good day if everyone in the family only cries once. So about your work routine. Yeah…what routine? In this absolute chaos you’ve been dumped on with jobs you didn’t apply for - teacher/principal, parent, disciplinarian, av department, 24/7 cook, cleaning staff. How are you supposed to keep your business going? Take a deep breath and stick with me because on today’s joycast, we’ll talk about how to work from home with kids and still get things done so you don’t end up fighting your kiddos for a corner to cry in.
We’ve all had it happen. A well-meaning friend or relative tries to give you business advice on what you should and shouldn’t do in your photography business. But they aren’t an expert at all. Your hubby who says “You have to sell digital files.” Or your mom who says “everyone other photographer around here charges under $200 and you’re new so you better be cheaper.” Or your friend who says “I’d never pay that for pictures and no one I know will either.” If you’ve ever had a conversation like this with a loved one, I’m talking to YOU in this episode. So hit play and learn how you can still share what’s going on in your business with your family without having to accept their business advice.